Qwest LSOG6 Pre-Order

Document Sample
Qwest LSOG6 Pre-Order Powered By Docstoc
					                           Effective October 25, 2010
                 LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120




 Pre-Order Process (POP)
LSOG 6 Preparation Guide
         V40.0
                                                                                                            Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                  LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

                                                           TABLE OF CONTENTS

HISTORY LOG ............................................................................................................................................. 8
1.0      GENERAL SECTION ........................................................................................................................ 8
2.0      PRE-ORDER PROCESS (POP) ......................................................................................................... 9
   2.1     ADDRESS VALIDATION ............................................................................................................ 9
   2.2     APPOINTMENT ...........................................................................................................................10
   2.3     CONNECTING FACILITY ASSIGNMENT (CFA) ....................................................................11
   2.4     DESIGN LAYOUT RECORD (DLR) ..........................................................................................11
   2.5     FACILITY AVAILABILITY ........................................................................................................11
   2.6     MEET POINT QUERY .................................................................................................................11
   2.7     RAW LOOP DATA/LOOP QUALIFICATION ...........................................................................12
   2.8     SERVICE AVAILABILITY .........................................................................................................12
   2.9     TELEPHONE NUMBER ..............................................................................................................12
   2.10 CANCEL TRANSACTION ..........................................................................................................13
3.0      PRE-ORDER MATRICIES ..............................................................................................................15
4.0      DATA ELEMENT DESCRIPTIONS ...............................................................................................90
      1.        CCNA - Customer Carrier Name Abbreviation......................................................................90
      1a.     APPTACT – Appointment Activity – Qwest-Specific Field .....................................................91
      1b.     NONPREM – Non Premises Work Time – Qwest-Specific Field ............................................92
      1c.     PREM – Premises Work Time – Qwest-Specific Field .............................................................93
      1d.     TOTAL – Total Non-Premises/Premises Work Time – Qwest-Specific Field ..........................94
      2. TXNUM - Transaction Number ....................................................................................................95
      3. D/TSENT - Date and Time Sent ....................................................................................................96
      4. TXTYP - Transaction Type ...........................................................................................................97
      5. TXACT - Transaction Activity ......................................................................................................99
      5a.     SEARCHTYP – Search Type – Qwest-Specific Field ............................................................101
      5b.     SCATEG – Search Category – Qwest-Specific Field ..............................................................102
      6. CC - Company Code....................................................................................................................103
      7. MS - Market Segment ..................................................................................................................104
      7a.     RESPONSE – Response Type – Qwest-Specific Field ...........................................................105
      7b.     MIXTYPE - Mixed Response Type – Qwest-Specific Field ...................................................106
      7c.     PON – Purchase Order Number – Qwest-Specific Field .........................................................107
      7d.     ACNA – Access Carrier Name Abbreviation – Qwest-Specific Field ....................................108
      7e.     QLR – Quantity of Lines Requested – Qwest-Specific Field ..................................................109
      7f.     POTSSPLITLOC – POTS Splitter Location – Qwest-Specific Field ......................................110
      7g.     POTSSPLITQTY – POTS Splitter Quantity – Qwest-Specific Field ......................................111
      7h.     CABCONNQTY – Cable Connection Quantity – Qwest-Specific Field ................................112
      7i.     POTSSPLITNUM – Number of POTS Split Facilities – Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently
      used by Qwest .....................................................................................................................................113
      7j.     CABCONNNUM – Number of Cable Connection Facilities – Qwest-Specific Field – Not
      currently used by Qwest ......................................................................................................................114
      7k.     INFOTYPE – Information Type Requested – Qwest-Specific Field.......................................115
      8. LCS – Local Calling Scope – Not currently used by Qwest ........................................................116
      9. TOS - Type of Service .................................................................................................................117
      10.     RESID - Response Identifier – Not currently used by Qwest ..................................................119
      11.     EAN - Existing Account Number – Not currently used by Qwest ..........................................120
      12.     EATN - Existing Account Telephone Number – Not currently used by Qwest ......................121
      13.     CAI - Concatenated Address Information – Not currently used by Qwest ..............................122
      14.     AFT - Address Format Type....................................................................................................123
      15.     SAPR - Service Address Number Prefix .................................................................................124
      16.     SANO - Service Address Number ...........................................................................................126
      17.     SANOR - Service Address Number Range – Not currently used by Qwest ............................129
      18.     SASF - Service Address Number Suffix .................................................................................130
      19.     SASD - Service Address Street Directional Prefix ..................................................................132
      20.     SASN - Service Address Street Name .....................................................................................134




                                                                            2
                                                                                                            Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                        LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120
21.     SATH - Service Address Street Type ......................................................................................138
22.     SASS - Service Address Street Directional Suffix ..................................................................140
23.     LD1 - Location Designator 1 ...................................................................................................142
24.     LV1 - Location Value 1 ...........................................................................................................144
25.     LD2 - Location Designator 2 ...................................................................................................146
26.     LV2 - Location Value 2 ...........................................................................................................148
27.     LD3 - Location Designator 3 ...................................................................................................150
28.     LV3 - Location Value 3 ...........................................................................................................152
28a. AHN – Assigned House Number - Qwest-Specific Field ........................................................154
28b. ROUTE – Rural Route - Qwest-Specific Field........................................................................156
28c. BOX – Box Number - Qwest-Specific Field ...........................................................................157
28d. LNAME – Listed Name - Qwest-Specific Field......................................................................158
29.     AA1 – Address Additional Information – Not currently used by Qwest .................................159
29a. TPRDI – Third Party, Resale or DSL - Qwest-Specific Field .................................................160
30.     CITY – City .............................................................................................................................161
31.     STATE - State/Province ..........................................................................................................163
32.     ZIP - ZIP/Postal Code..............................................................................................................165
32a. CALA – Customer Address Location Area – Qwest-Specific Field .......................................167
32b. ADDRES – Address Type Indicator – Qwest-Specific Field ..................................................170
32c. SAGMESS – Street Address Guide Message – Qwest-Specific Field ....................................171
32d. LOCA – Location A - Qwest-Specific Field ...........................................................................172
32e. LOCZ – Location Z - Qwest-Specific Field ............................................................................173
32f. CABNM – Cable Name - Qwest-Specific Field ......................................................................174
32g. FIRST UNIT – First Unit - Qwest-Specific Field ...................................................................175
32h. LAST UNIT – Last Unit - Qwest-Specific Field .....................................................................176
32i. GROUPNUM – Number of CFA Groups - Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently used by
Qwest 177
32j. CABTYP – Cable Type - Qwest-Specific Field ......................................................................178
32k. INVSTAT – Inventory Status - Qwest-Specific Field .............................................................179
32l. QTYSPARE – Quantity Spare - Qwest-Specific Field ............................................................180
32m.      PCTAVAIL – Percent Available - Qwest-Specific Field ....................................................181
32n. UNITNUM – Number of Units - Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently used by Qwest .........182
32o. UNIT – Unit - Qwest-Specific Field........................................................................................183
32p. SUBDF – Sub Division From - Qwest-Specific Field .............................................................184
32q. SUBDT – Sub Division To - Qwest-Specific Field .................................................................185
32r. ASGTRSTN – Assignment Restriction Code - Qwest-Specific Field .....................................186
32s. CURACT – Current Activity - Qwest-Specific Field ..............................................................187
32t. PNDACT – Pending Activity - Qwest-Specific Field .............................................................188
32u. D – Diversity Indicator - Qwest-Specific Field .......................................................................189
32v. CKTID/CLO – Circuit ID/Circuit Layout Order Number – Qwest-Specific Field .................190
32w.      DUEDT – Due Date - Qwest-Specific Field........................................................................191
33.     LALOC – Listed Address Locality – Not currently used by Qwest ........................................192
33a. CKTFORMAT – Circuit ID Format Type - Qwest-Specific Field ..........................................193
33b. SERNUMCKT – Serial Number Circuit – Qwest-Specific Field ............................................194
33c. TELNUMCKT – Telephone Number Circuit – Qwest-Specific Field ....................................195
33d. CARFACCKT – Carriers Facility Circuit – Qwest-Specific Field ..........................................196
33e. MSGTRKCKT – Message Trunk Circuit – Qwest-Specific Field ..........................................197
33f. DLRHDR – Design Layout Record Header – Qwest-Specific Field .......................................198
33g. NUMDLRDTL – Number of Design Layout Record Details – Qwest-Specific Field – Not
currently used by Qwest ......................................................................................................................199
33h. DLRDTL – Design Layout Record Details – Qwest-Specific Field ........................................200
33i. REQUAL – Re-qualification – Qwest-Specific Field..............................................................201
33j. REQUALEMAIL – Re-qualification Contact Email – Qwest-Specific Field .........................202
34.     FTWP – Foreign Township – Not currently used by Qwest ....................................................203
34a. SERCD – Hi Capacity or Design Service Facilities – Qwest-Specific Field ...........................204
34b. USOC – Universal Service Order Code – Qwest-Specific Field .............................................205
34c. MUXLOC – MUX Location – Qwest-Specific Field ..............................................................206




                                                                     3
                                                                                                              Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                          LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120
34d. TNADDRCKTIND – Telephone Number, Address, Circuit Indicator – Qwest-Specific Field
       207
34e. NUMPT – Number of Ports – Qwest-Specific Field ...............................................................208
34f. LOOPCHAR – Loop Characteristics – Qwest-Specific Field .................................................209
34g. FACDES – Facility Designation – Qwest-Specific Field ........................................................210
34h. FACTYP – Facility Type – Qwest-Specific Field ...................................................................211
34i. CHAN – Channel – Qwest-Specific Field ...............................................................................212
34j. QUALEXIST – Qualify Existing – Qwest-Specific Field .......................................................213
34k. DSLSERV – DSL Service – Qwest-Specific Field .................................................................214
34l. WLINUM – Working Lines Left In – Qwest-Specific Field ...................................................215
34m.     DSVC – Dual Service Availability – Qwest-Specific Field ................................................216
34n. REMINDER – Dual Service Reminder – Qwest-Specific Field .............................................217
34o. LINESTAT – Line Status – Qwest-Specific Field ..................................................................218
34p. REMARK – Remark – Qwest-Specific Field ..........................................................................219
34q. PRODNOTNUM – Products Not Supported Number – Qwest-Specific Field- Not currently
used by Qwest .....................................................................................................................................220
34r. PRODNOTSUP – Products Not Supported – Qwest-Specific Field .......................................221
34s. PENDNUM – Pending Order Number – Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently used by Qwest
       222
34t. PDORDERTYP – Pending Order Type – Qwest-Specific Field .............................................223
34u. ORDNUM – Order Number – Qwest-Specific Field ..............................................................224
34v. PDORDERDD – Pending Order Due Date – Qwest-Specific Field ........................................225
34w.     LOCANFACS – Location A Facility Status – Qwest-Specific Field ..................................226
34x. LOCARMKS – Location A Remarks – Qwest-Specific Field ................................................227
34y. LOCZNFACS – Location Z Facility Status – Qwest-Specific Field .......................................228
34z. LOCZRMKS – Location Z Remarks – Qwest-Specific Field .................................................229
34aa.    MUXST – MUX Status – Qwest-Specific Field ..................................................................230
34ab.    CFAST – CFA Status – Qwest-Specific Field .....................................................................231
35.    ALTADDNUM - Alternate Addresses ....................................................................................232
35a. DESCRIPTIVE – Descriptive Address – Qwest-Specific Field ..............................................233
35b. ALTERNATE STREET – Alternate Street – Qwest-Specific Field .......................................234
35c. PNARMKNUM – Number of Primary Number Address Remarks – Qwest-Specific Field –
Not currently used by Qwest ...............................................................................................................235
35d. PNARMK – Primary Number Address Remarks – Qwest-Specific Field...............................236
35e. SLRMK – Service Location Remarks – Qwest-Specific Field ................................................237
35f. SITEID – Site ID – Qwest-Specific Field ...............................................................................238
35g. TTA – Traffic Terminating Area – Qwest-Specific Field .......................................................239
35h. RATEZONE – Rate Zone – Qwest-Specific Field ..................................................................240
35i. SWTYPNUM – Switch Type Number – Qwest-Specific Field ..............................................241
35j. SWTYP – Switch Type – Qwest-Specific Field ......................................................................242
35k. SWIND – Switch Indicator – Qwest-Specific Field ................................................................243
35l. ISDNFLAG – ISDN Indicator – Qwest-Specific Field ...........................................................244
35m.     SN56FLAG – Switched Net 56 Indicator – Qwest-Specific Field ......................................245
35n. CC64FLAG – Clear Channel Capable Indicator – Qwest-Specific Field ................................246
35o. X75FLAG – X.75 Capability Indicator – Qwest-Specific Field..............................................247
35p. DESCNUM – Description Number – Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently used by Qwest ..248
35q. LINESNUM – Number of Lines – Qwest-Specific Field ........................................................249
35r. DESC – Description – Qwest-Specific Field ...........................................................................250
35s. LINENUM – Number of Lines – Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently used by Qwest ........251
35t. SERVON – Served On – Qwest-Specific Field .......................................................................252
35u. LOAD – Loading – Qwest-Specific Field ...............................................................................253
35v. MOVE – Can be Moved To – Qwest-Specific Field ...............................................................254
36.    DSIND - Dispatch Indicator ....................................................................................................255
36a. NMNUM – Near Match Number – Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently used by Qwest .....256
36b. MCNUM – Multiple CALA Match Number – Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently used by
Qwest 257
36c. HNRANGE – House Number Range – Qwest-Specific Field .................................................258




                                                                      4
                                                                                                                  Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120
36d. RANGEIND – Range Indicator – Qwest-Specific Field .........................................................259
37.     APPRD - Appointment Request Date ......................................................................................260
37a. QNCNUM – Quantity of Non-Cancelled Telephone Numbers – Qwest-Specific Field – Not
currently used by Qwest ......................................................................................................................261
37b. NCTN – Non-Cancelled Telephone Number – Qwest-Specific Field .....................................262
38.     APPRES – Appoint Response Date – Not currently used by Qwest .......................................263
38a. POTSSPLIT – POTS Splitter – Qwest-Specific Field .............................................................264
38b. CABCONN – Cable Connection – Qwest-Specific Field .......................................................265
38c. LOPOTSSPLIT – Low POTS Splitter – Qwest-Specific Field ...............................................266
38d. HIPOTSSPLIT – High POTS Splitter – Qwest-Specific Field ................................................267
38e. LOCABCONN – Low Cable Connection – Qwest-Specific Field .........................................268
38f. HICABCONN – High Cable Connection – Qwest-Specific Field ..........................................269
38g. INVMSG – Inventory Message – Qwest-Specific Field .........................................................270
39.     QR - Quantity Requested .........................................................................................................272
39a. ASGNIND – Assignment Indicator – Qwest-Specific Field ...................................................273
39b. WTNQ – Working 10 Digit Telephone Number – Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently used
by Qwest ..............................................................................................................................................274
39c. WTNNUM – Number of Working Telephone Numbers – Qwest-Specific Field ...................275
39d. ECCKTQ – ECCKT Quantity – Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently used by Qwest ..........276
39e. ECCKTNUM – Index of ECCKT/rows in Response – Qwest-Specific Field .........................277
39f. WTNSTAT – WTN Status – Qwest-Specific Field .................................................................278
39g. WCCLLI – Wire Center CLLI – Qwest-Specific Field ...........................................................279
39h. MLTDIST – MLT Distance – Qwest-Specific Field ...............................................................280
39i. SEGMENTQTY – Segment Quantity – Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently used by Qwest
        281
39j. SEGMENTNUM – Segment Number – Qwest-Specific Field ...............................................282
39k. TERMINAL ID – Terminal ID – Qwest-Specific Field ..........................................................283
39l. BRIDGE_TAP_OFFSET_DESC – Bridged Tap Offset Description – Qwest-Specific Field 284
39m.      MAKE_UP_DESC – Make Up Description – Qwest-Specific Field ..................................285
39n. CABLE_NAME – Cable Name – Qwest-Specific Field .........................................................286
39o. PAIR_GAIN_TYPE – Pair Gain Type – Qwest-Specific Field ..............................................287
39p. PAIR_NUMBER – Pair Number – Qwest-Specific Field .......................................................288
39q. LOADPTAMT – Load Points Amount – Qwest-Specific Field ..............................................289
40.     TNTYPE - Telephone Number Type.......................................................................................290
41.     REQNUM - Requested Number ..............................................................................................291
41a. JACKNUM - Jack Number – Qwest-Specific Field ................................................................293
41b. USOCNUM – Number of other USOCs – Qwest-Specific Field ............................................294
41c. OTHERUSOCS – Other USOCs – Qwest-Specific Field .......................................................295
41d. NUMSLOTS – Number of Slots – Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently used by Qwest ......296
41e. AVAILIND – Appointment Availability Indicator – Qwest-Specific Field ............................297
41f. APPSLOT – Appointment Slot – Qwest-Specific Field ..........................................................298
41g. COMPDATE – Completion Date – Qwest-Specific Field ......................................................299
41h. COMPTIME – Completion Time – Qwest-Specific Field ......................................................300
41i. ABTIME – After – Before Time – Qwest-Specific Field ........................................................301
41j. INQRES NBR – Inquiry Response Number – Qwest-Specific Field ......................................303
42.     HUNT – Hunt – Not currently used by Qwest ........................................................................304
43.     TNRES - Telephone Number Response ..................................................................................305
44.     HNTRES – Hunt Group Restriction – Not currently used by Qwest ......................................306
45.     LSO - Local Service Office .....................................................................................................307
46.     NPA/NXX - NPA/NXX ..........................................................................................................310
46a. NPA – Preferred NPA – Qwest-Specific Field ........................................................................311
46b. NXX – Preferred NXX – Qwest-Specific Field ......................................................................312
46c. NTNUM – Nearby Telephone Number – Qwest-Specific Field .............................................313
46d. CBLOCK – Consecutive Block – Qwest-Specific Field .........................................................314
46e. EASNUM – Easy Numbers – Qwest-Specific Field ...............................................................315
46f. ECATEG – Easy Number Category – Qwest-Specific Field ..................................................316
46g. EWORD – Easy Word to Find – Qwest-Specific Field ...........................................................317




                                                                        5
                                                                                                                  Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120
46h. EJUST – Easy Word Justification – Qwest-Specific Field ......................................................318
46i. CUSTOMIND – Custom Indicator – Qwest-Specific Field ....................................................319
47.   ALTLSO – Alternate LSO – Not currently used by Qwest .....................................................320
47a. FEATNUM – Number of Features – Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently used by Qwest ...321
47b. USOC – USOC – Qwest-Specific Field ..................................................................................322
47c. USOCMOD – USOC Modifier – Qwest-Specific Field ..........................................................323
47d. SUPPORTED – Switch Support – Qwest-Specific Field ........................................................324
47e. RRATE – Recurring Retail Rate – Qwest-Specific Field ........................................................325
47f. NRATE – Non-Recurring Retail Rate – Qwest-Specific Field ...............................................326
47g. USOCDESC – USOC Title – Qwest-Specific Field ................................................................327
47h. RDISC – Recurring Discount Percentage – Qwest-Specific Field ..........................................328
47i. NDISC – Non-Recurring Discount Percentage – Qwest-Specific Field ..................................329
47j. CARRNUM – Number of Carriers – Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently used by Qwest ...330
47k. CIC – Carrier ID – Qwest-Specific Field ................................................................................331
47l. CARRNAME – Carrier Name – Qwest-Specific Field ...........................................................332
47m.      LATACODE – Local Access Transport Area Code – Qwest-Specific Field ......................333
47n. SWITCHNUM – Number of Switches – Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently used by Qwest
      334
47o. NPANXXNUM – Number of NPA/NXXs – Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently used by
Qwest 335
47p. SWTYPE – Switch Type – Qwest-Specific Field ...................................................................336
48.   FETAVA - Feature Availability ..............................................................................................337
49.   FRESP – Feature/Service Response – Not currently used by Qwest .......................................338
49a. TNCOUNT – Telephone Number Count – Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently used by Qwest
      339
49b. SNR – Selected Numbers Returned – Qwest-Specific Field ...................................................340
49c. SELNUM – CLEC Selected Telephone Number Count – Qwest-Specific Field ....................341
49d. QNSNUM – Quantity of Non-Selected Numbers – Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently used
by Qwest ..............................................................................................................................................342
49e. NSELTN – Non-Selected Telephone Number – Qwest-Specific Field ...................................343
50.   AVD – Available Date – Not currently used by Qwest ...........................................................344
51.   PICLIS – InterLATA PIC List – Not currently used by Qwest ...............................................345
52.   LPICLIS – IntraLATA PIC List – Not currently used by Qwest ............................................346
53.   IPICLIS – International PIC List – Not currently used by Qwest ...........................................347
54.   WTN - Working Telephone Number .......................................................................................348
55.   WSOPI – Working Service on Premises Indicator – Not currently used by Qwest ................350
56.   LST – Local Service Termination ...........................................................................................351
57.   NC – Network Channel Code ..................................................................................................352
58.   NCI – Network Channel Interface Code..................................................................................353
59.   SECNCI – Secondary Network Channel Interface Code – Not currently used by Qwest .......355
60.   CS - Class of Service ...............................................................................................................356
60a. NITEQ – Number of Informational Text Entries – Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently used
by Qwest ..............................................................................................................................................357
60b. WTN – Working Telephone Number Associated with Information Text – Qwest-Specific Field
      358
60c. ITYPE – Information Type – Qwest-Specific Field ................................................................359
60d. ITEXT – Information Text – Qwest-Specific Field .................................................................360
61.   SVCCFG – Service Configuration – Not currently used by Qwest .........................................361
62.   LNUM – Line Number – Not currently used by Qwest ..........................................................362
63.   ECCKT - Exchange Company Circuit ID ...............................................................................363
63a. PRIMARY NPANXX – Primary NPA-NXX ..........................................................................364
64.   SMC – Spectrum Management Classes – Not currently used by Qwest .................................365
64a. TYPE – Transport Protocol Type – Qwest-Specific Field ......................................................366
65.   LOOPSTAT - Loop Status ......................................................................................................367
66.   PGPRES – Pair Gain/DLC Presence .......................................................................................368
67.   DLCTYPE – DLC Type – Not currently used by Qwest ........................................................369
68.   DSSCP – DSSC Presence – Not currently used by Qwest ......................................................370




                                                                        6
                                                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                    LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120
   69.   LM – Loop Make-Up Type – Not currently used by Qwest ....................................................371
   70.   LCI – Location Code Identifier – Not currently used by Qwest ..............................................372
   71.   LC – Location Code – Not currently used by Qwest ...............................................................373
   72.   LCA – Location Code Address – Not currently used by Qwest ..............................................374
   73.   LLT – Loop Length Type ........................................................................................................375
   74.   GA – Gauge – Not currently used by Qwest ...........................................................................376
   75.   LL – Loop Length....................................................................................................................377
   76.   ILL – Incremental Loop Length – Not currently used by Qwest .............................................378
   77.   LU – Length Unit – Not currently used by Qwest ...................................................................379
   78.   LLG – Loop Length By Gauge ................................................................................................380
   78a. LOOPQUALMESG – Loop Qualification Message – Qwest-Specific Field ..........................381
   XML: LOOPQUALMSG ....................................................................................................................381
   78b. LLGQ – Loop Length by Gauge Quantity – Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently used by
   Qwest 382
   79.   ELL – Equivalent Loop Length ...............................................................................................383
   80.   LCQ – Load Coil Quantity – Not currently used by Qwest .....................................................384
   81.   LCT - Load Coil Type .............................................................................................................385
   82.   LCL – Load Coil Location – Not currently used by Qwest .....................................................386
   83.   BTQ – Bridge Tap Quantity ....................................................................................................387
   84.   BTL – Bridge Tap Location – Not currently used by Qwest ...................................................388
   85.   BTLEN – Bridge tap Length – Not currently used by Qwest ..................................................389
   86.   AFS – Assembled Facilities Status – Not currently used by Qwest ........................................390
   87.   CA – Cable – Not currently used by Qwest .............................................................................391
   88.   CHAN/PAIR – Channel/Pair – Not currently used by Qwest .................................................392
   89.   TRMED – Transmission Medium Type – Not currently used by Qwest.................................393
   90.   LMSTAT – Loop Make-Up Status – Not currently used by Qwest ........................................394
   91.   LDSP – Load Spacing – Not currently used by Qwest ............................................................395
   92.   TYCA – Type of Cable – Not currently used by Qwest ..........................................................396
   93.   CAPAC – Capacitance – Not currently used by Qwest ...........................................................397
   94.   BOCAP – Build Out Capacitance – Not currently used by Qwest ..........................................398
   95.   BORES – Build Out Resistance – Not currently used by Qwest .............................................399
   96.   BOOFF – Build Out Offset – Not currently used by Qwest ....................................................400
   97.   ABP – Assignable Binding Post – Not currently used by Qwest ............................................401
   98.   SSC – Single Subscriber Carrier Indicator – Not currently used by Qwest .............................402
   99.   RTF – Receive/Transmit Indicator – Not currently used by Qwest.........................................403
   100. F1DT – F1 Disturber Type – Not currently used by Qwest .....................................................404
   101. F1DL – F1 Disturber Location – Not currently used by Qwest ...............................................405
   102. F1LPCP – F1 Loop Composition ............................................................................................406
   103. F2DT – F2 Disturber Type – Not currently used by Qwest .....................................................407
   104. F2DL – F2 Disturber Location – Not currently used by Qwest ...............................................408
   105. F2LPCP – F2 Loop Composition ............................................................................................409
   106. LPAC – Loop Product Available Code ...................................................................................410
   107. LSA – Loop Speeds Available – Not currently used by Qwest ...............................................411
   108. ILD – Insertion Loss In Decibels – Not currently used by Qwest ...........................................412
   109. TC – Taper Code – Not currently used by Qwest ....................................................................413
   110. WCN – Wire Center Name – Not currently used by Qwest ....................................................414
   111. RSUIND – Remote Switch Unit Indicator ..............................................................................415
   112. RESPC – Response Code – Not currently used by Qwest .......................................................416
   113. RESPD – Response Description – Not currently used by Qwest ............................................417
   113a.   ERRNUM – Number of Errors – Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently used by Qwest .....418
   113b.   ERRCODE – Error Code – Qwest-Specific Field ...............................................................419
   113c.   ERRMESG – Error Message – Qwest-Specific Field .........................................................420
   114. PRESPC – Provider Response Code – Not currently used by Qwest .........................................421
   115. PRESPD – Provider Response Description – Not currently used by Qwest ...........................422
5.0    ALPHANUMERIC GLOSSARY ...............................................................................................423




                                                                     7
                                                                              Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                    LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120


HISTORY LOG
The History Log for this document may be accessed from the Table of Contents at the following Web site:
http://www.qwest.com/wholesale/clecs/lsog.html. The link to the downloadable History Log has been
indented under Pre-Order (POP).

1.0          GENERAL SECTION
This guide describes the following pre-order inquiry functions that may take place prior to the ordering
process. These functions allow CLEC’s to:

         Validate a service address
         Schedule, reserve or cancel an appointment
         Determine qualification status of facilities
         Receive a Design Layout Record (DLR)
         Determine the availability of facilities
         Arrange for Shared Loop Service
         Access Raw Loop Data by segment and sub-segment
         Service Availability
         Telephone Number Reservation
         Loop Qualification

Note: Pre-Order functions are limited to IMA GUI (Graphical User Interface) and XML (Extensible
Markup Language) applications; however, manual interface users can refer to Qwest’s Wholesale site:
http://www.qwest.com/wholesale/clecs/manualinterfaces.html for manual process information.

Each function may be comprised of one or more inquiry and response transactions. The CLEC generates
inquiries and Qwest returns responses. There are no interdependencies between functions. Each function is
considered optional. This guide describes the inputs and outputs associated with pre-order. This pre-order
guide contains the necessary data entries for address validation, telephone number assignment,
feature/service availability, appointment scheduling, service configuration, Customer Service Record
requests, Meet Point billing, CFA (Connecting Facility Assignment), and loop qualification.




                                                     8
                                                                             Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                   LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

2.0          PRE-ORDER PROCESS (POP)


2.1          ADDRESS VALIDATION
This function provides the ability to validate the address given to the CLEC by the end-user. Qwest’s
Operations Support Systems (OSS) can indicate if there is a match.

Several IMA functions require a valid customer address. If a user submits a request and IMA is unable to
match the customer address to a single address in LFACS AN, IMA will reject the request. To prevent
rejections, a user should validate customer address before submitting requests to IMA.

CLEC’s can validate up to 10 addresses in a GUI work session. Validated addresses are listed for selection
on other forms. When selected, IMA uses the address information to populate fields on the form.

        NOTE: IMA retains the list of validated addresses throughout a work session. Once the user
              exits IMA, the list is purged. When the user logs back into IMA, the user must validate
              addresses in order to create a new list.

Addresses can be validated by street address or by telephone number. Searches by street address find exact
matches more efficiently because Qwest’s databases do not include telephone numbers for certain types of
service. In addition, information associated with a telephone number may belong to a previous customer
due to the amount of time required to update Qwest legacy systems. This is especially important for new
installations.


2.1.1      Multiple and Near Match Address Section

The Multiple and Near Match Address Section is required only if a Near Match is found (ADDRES = C) or
a multiple Match is found (ADDRES = D). Multiple match addresses may occur in the following
situations:
         Telephone numbers with Dual Service
         While an address is being updated to non-working in the legacy system
         If there are multiple addresses for a TN in a status of WORKING, PEND-OUT or SUSPEND


2.1.2   Exact Match Section

This section is required only if an Exact Match response is returned for the requested input
(ADDRES = A). Supplemental information may also be returned with an exact match. The system can
correct information entered on a query and return the corrected information on an exact match. (The CLEC
should always use the corrected information on subsequent queries or orders.)

2.1.3   Supplemental Information Section

This is a sub-section of the Exact Match Section. It provides supplemental information on LD1, LV1, LD2,
LV2, LD3, LV3 when an exact match is found on the input address and the location information on the
AVQ is incorrect or missing. This list is a subset of valid values and not a full list of all the possible
locations.




                                                    9
                                                                              Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                    LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120




2.2          APPOINTMENT
The appointment process enables a CLEC to reserve a specific date and time from the Qwest Appointment
Scheduler to dispatch a technician for premises or non-premises work. The appointment process is used
when the Facility Availability Response indicates that a dispatch is necessary, such as when an LSR is for a
new line installation or when other physical work is needed at either the wire center or the customer’s
premises.

The products and services for which appointments can be scheduled in the Pre-Order process are:
         POTS
         ISDN (under certain circumstances)
         Centrex (for Non-design Services)
         PBX
         PAL
When an original LSR has an appointment scheduled, the appointment must be changed in order to update
the DDD before the supplemental order will be accepted. Appointments are changed by selecting a new
appointment for the PON. Appointments not attached to a PON are automatically cancelled after 24 IMA
business hours.

NOTE: An appointment cannot be canceled via the GUI; therefore, it will need to be returned manually.
Alternatively, a different PON can be used to resubmit the LSR without an appointment.

2.2.1 Appointment Selection Query (ASQ) - This section is required only if the CLEC wishes to select an
appointment other than the pre-reserved appointment obtained via AAR.

2.2.2 Appointment Selection Response (ASR) - If RESPONSE = G, then an order (if it does not exist) or a
supplemental order (if an order already exists) without fatal errors must be received within a pre-
determined time frame (e.g., 24 business hours) either (1) after reserving the appointment/commitment, or
(2) before the start time of the appointment/commitment, which ever is earlier.

2.2.3 Appointment Confirmation Section that is a part of Appointment Availability Response (AAR) -
This section, when populated, contains the pre-reserved appointment information. If the CLEC wants to
select an appointment other than the pre-reserved appointment, then an ASQ needs to be performed;
otherwise no ASQ is needed.




                                                    10
                                                                                 Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                       LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120


2.3           CONNECTING FACILITY ASSIGNMENT (CFA)
The validate CFA (Connecting Facility Assignment) function allows you to query for a list of valid CFAs
and to view all available and unavailable CFAs from the valid CFA list.


2.4           DESIGN LAYOUT RECORD (DLR)
A Design Layout Record (DLR) contains technical information describing a circuit’s facilities and
terminations provided by Qwest to CLEC. You can use this technical information, such as cable makeup,
carrier channel bank type and system mileage, signaling termination compatibility, and so on, to design the
overall service.

The View DLR function automates the manual process used to request a DLR, e-mail the DLR data, and
print DLR data to your local printer.

With this functionality, you will be able to do the following:

         Input a Circuit ID, which you own, and submit a DLR request

         Receive either the requested DLR data or an error message describing why the data was not
          returned


2.5           FACILITY AVAILABILITY
          The Facility Availability process sends a request to the Qwest OSS (Operating Support Systems)
          to check whether facilities currently exist or new facilities are required to fulfill the end-user’s
          request.


2.6           MEET POINT QUERY
IMA’s Meet Point Query functionality supports Qwest’s Shared Loop service. Shared Loop (also known
as Line Sharing) enables a Qwest loop to be unbundled so that the voice portion of the loop remains
connected to a Qwest switch while the data portion of the loop is connected to a CLEC’s data service. In
order to share a loop, a CLEC must have the appropriate equipment co-located within the Qwest Central
Office.

A CLEC can use the Meet Point Query functionality to query IMA for a list of 1-5 individual meet points
or a range of meet points. IMA does not limit the size of the range. However, due to the limitations of
Qwest legacy systems, IMA will only return the first ten meet points in a range. To see other meet points
in a range, a user must adjust the range and submit a new query. For example, a query with a range of 001
– 050 will return meet points between 001– 010. To obtain additional meet points, a new range such as
011- 021 must be entered.

Four query types are available:

           POTS Splitter List          Cable Connection List
           POTS Splitter Range         Cable Connection Range




                                                      11
                                                                                    Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                          LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120




2.7           RAW LOOP DATA/LOOP QUALIFICATION
The Raw Loop Data and Loop Qualification queries support the Pre-Order functions for 2/4 wire non-
loaded loops, ADSL compatible loops, ISDN BRI capable loops, xDSL-I capable loops, Line
Sharing/Shared Loop, Sub-Loop, Unbundled packet Switching, Line Splitting, Loop Splitting, and Shared
Distribution Loops.

Loop Qualification: This transaction is used to determine if telecommunication facilities currently exist,
new facilities are required, if existing facilities can be reused or existing facilities qualify to fulfill the end-
user’s request. Information regarding the Loop Qualification process is described in Appendix E of the
Loop Qualification and Raw Loop Data CLEC Job Aid found at:
http://www.qwest.com/wholesale/downloads/lqrld_clecjobaid.pdf


Raw Loop Data: This transaction can report on the physical parameters of the network facility. A CLEC
end-user must have advanced telecommunication engineering knowledge to interpret the significance of
raw loop data to a specific product. The most common function of the Raw Loop Data transactions is to
check network elements related to the support of xDSL unbundled loops and Shared Loop ADSL facilities.


2.8           SERVICE AVAILABILITY
The Service Availability function lets the CLEC confirm that the products, services, and/or carriers
requested by the customer can be supported in the Central Office. Using information from the Co-
Provider’s contract and the State in which the services are requested, the Service Availability function
identifies and displays the USOCs that can be resold.

              NOTE: If you submit a POTS, PBX, Resale – Qwest DSL, or ISDN order that has invalid
              USOCs, IMA lists the invalid USOCs and displays the information in error message format.


2.9           TELEPHONE NUMBER
The Telephone Number Reservation process lets the CLEC reserve an available telephone number from the
Qwest OSS (Operating Support Systems). This must be done when requesting any of the following:

             New service
             A new line on existing service
             A change of telephone number

Telephone numbers cannot be reserved for Design Services.

The Telephone Number Reservation process is divided into Telephone Number Availability, selection,
exchange, and return functionality.

              NOTE: You can only reserve nine telephone numbers at a time for a given address. If you
              need to reserve more than nine telephone numbers or vanity numbers, contact the
              Interconnect Service Center for more information.




                                                         12
                                                                                 Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                       LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

2.10          CANCEL TRANSACTION
This transaction is used to accomplish the following:

        Cancel an Appointment
        Cancel a reserved Telephone Number(s)

Use of this transaction is limited to un-issued orders. If an order has been issued for this service(s), then
that order must be SUPPed and this transaction cannot be used.




                                                       13
                                                                                                                                                    Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                          LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



     3.0          PRE-ORDER MATRICIES



Field Name & Number        Description      Address     Appointment         CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                           Validation     (APT)                             Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                             (AV)                                              (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                            (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry         I   R        I       R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I     R      I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
       AAI             Address
        29             Additional
                       Information –
                       CSRR Section –
                       Not currently
                       used by Qwest
       ABP             Assignable
        97             Binding Post –
                       Not currently
                       used by Qwest
     ABTIME            After-Before Time                    X
       41i             – Qwest-Specific
                       Field – AAQ
                       Appointment
                       Confirmation
                       Section
                       AAR Appointment                              X
                       Confirmation
                       Section
                       ASR Appointment                              X
                       Selection Section




                                                                                  15
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                    Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                          LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description        Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                             Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                               (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                            (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry           I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I       R    I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
      ACNA             Access Carrier                                   X     X   X     X
       7d              Name – Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       CFAQ, CFAR,
                       DLRQ, DLRR
                       Administrative
                       Sections
     ADDRES            Address Type                  X
       32b             Indicator - Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       AVR Address
                       Match Section
       AFT             Address Format        X
        14             Type AVQ
                       Address Section
                       FAQ Telephone                                                        X*
                       Number Address
                       Circuit Indicator
                       Section
                       RLDQ Address                                                                                  X                            X
                       Query Section
                       LQQ Query by                                                                                                                                  X
                       Address Section
       AFS             Assembled
        86             Facilities Status –
                       Not currently
                       used by Qwest
       AHN             Assigned House        X
        28a            Number - Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       AVQ Address
                       Section


                                                                                  16
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                  Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                        LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description      Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                           Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                             (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                          (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry         I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I       R    I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
                       AVR Exact Match             X
                       Section
                       AVR Multiple and         X*
                       Near Match
                       Address Section
                       FAQ Telephone                                                      X*
                       Number Address
                       Circuit Indicator
                       Section
                       RLDQ Address                                                                                X
                       Query Section
                       TNAQ Address                                                                                                             X
                       Section
                       LQQ Query by                                                                                                                                X
                       Address Section
                       LQR Response                                                                                                                                        X
                       Address Section
   ALTADDNUM           Alternate                   X
       35              Addresses
                       Number – AVR
                       Supplemental
                       Information
                       Section
ALTERNATE STREET       Alternate Street            X
      35b              Address - Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       AVR Message
                       Section
     ALTLSO            Alternate LSO –
       47              Not currently
                       used by Qwest



                                                                                17
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                      Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                            LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description       Address     Appointment         CFA        DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                            Validation     (APT)                              Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                              (AV)                                               (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                              (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry          I   R        I       R       I     R    I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I     R      I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
      APPRD            Appointment                           X
        37             Request Date –
                       AAQ Appointment
                       Request Section
                       ASQ Appointment                       X
                       Selection Section
     APPRES            Appointment
       38              Response Date –
                       Not currently
                       used by Qwest
     APPSLOT           Appointment Slot                          X*
       41f             - Qwest-Specific
                       Field – AAR
                       Appointment
                       Availability
                       Section
     APPTACT           Appointment                           X       X
        1a             Activity - Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       AAQ, AAR
                       Administrative
                       Sections
     ASGNIND           Assignment                                                                                      X
       39a             Indicator - Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       RLDQ Raw Loop
                       Data Section
    ASGTRSTN           Assignment                                              X*
       32r             Restriction Code -
                       Qwest-Specific
                       Field – CFAR
                       Cable Pair Units
                       Section

                                                                                    18
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                   Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                         LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description       Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                            Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                              (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                           (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry          I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I     R      I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
    AVAILIND           Appointment                              X*
      41e              Availability
                       Indicator - Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       AAR Appointment
                       Availability
                       Section
       AVD             Available Date –
        50             Not currently
                       used by Qwest
      BOCAP            Build Out
        94             Capacitance – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
      BOOFF            Build Out Offset –
        96             Not currently
                       used by Qwest
      BORES            Build Out
        95             Resistance – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest1
       BOX             Box Number -         X
       28c             Qwest-Specific
                       Field – AVQ
                       Section
                       AVR Exact Match              X
                       Address Section
                       AVR Multiple and          X*
                       Near Match
                       Section




                                                                                 19
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                  Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                        LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description      Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                           Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                             (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                          (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry         I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I       R    I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
                       FAQ Telephone                                                      X*
                       Number Address
                       Circuit Indicator
                       Section
                       RLDQ Address                                                                                X
                       Query Section
                       TNAQ Address                                                                                                             X
                       Section
                       LQQ Query by                                                                                                                                X
                       Address Section
                       LQR Response                                                                                                                                        X
                       Address Section
BRIDGE_TAP_OFFSET      Bridge Tap Offset                                                                                X*
     _DESC 39l         Description -
                       Qwest-Specific
                       Field – RLDR Raw
                       Loop Data
                       Response Section
       BTL             Bridge Tap
        84             Location – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
      BTLEN            Bridge Tap
        85             Length – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
       BTQ             Bridge Tap                                                                                                                                          X*
        83             Quantity– LQR
                       Load Coil Section
        CA             Cable – Not
        87             currently used by
                       Qwest

                                                                                20
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                     Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                           LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description        Address     Appointment       CFA        DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                             Validation     (APT)                            Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                               (AV)                                             (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                             (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry           I   R        I     R       I     R    I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I     R      I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
    CABCONN            Cable Connection                                                                     X*
      38b              – Qwest-Specific
                       Field – MPQ
                       CCLQS Section
                       MPR CCS Section                                                                           X*
  CABCONNNUM           Number of Cable
       7j              Connection
                       Facilities - Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       MPR
                       Administrative
                       Section - Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
  CABCONNQTY           Cable Connection
      7h               Quantity - Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       MPQ,
                       Administrative
                       Section – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
     CABNM             Cable Name -                                     X
       32f             Qwest-Specific
                       Field – CFAQ
                       Cable Facility
                       Query Section
                       CFAR Cable Pair                                        X*
                       Groups Section
                       CFAR Cable Pair                                        X*
                       Units Section



                                                                                   21
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                   Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                         LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description      Address     Appointment       CFA        DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                           Validation     (APT)                            Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                             (AV)                                             (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                           (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry         I   R        I     R       I     R    I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I     R      I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
  CABLE_NAME           Cable Name –                                                                                      X*
      39n              Qwest-Specific
                       Field – RLDR Raw
                       Loop Data
                       Response Section
     CABTYP            Cable Type -                                         X
       32j             Qwest-Specific
                       Field CFAR Cable
                       Pair Groups
                       Section
                       CFAR Cable Pair                                      X*
                       Units Section
       CAI             Concatenated
        13             Address
                       Information – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
      CALA             Customer            X
       32a             Address Location
                       Area - Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       AVQ City/State
                       Section
                       AVR Exact Match             X
                       Section
                       AVR Multiple and         X*
                       Near Match
                       Address Section
                       AVR Multiple             X*
                       CALA Match
                       Address Section



                                                                                 22
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                    Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                          LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description       Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                            Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                              (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                           (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry          I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I       R    I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
                       FAQ Telephone                                                       X*
                       Number Address
                       Circuit Indicator
                       Section
                       RLDQ Address                                                                                 X
                       Section
                       TNAQ Address                                                                                                              X
                       Section
                       LQQ Query by                                                                                                                                 X
                       Address Section
                       LQQ Query by                                                                                                                                 X
                       WTN Section
                       LQR Response                                                                                                                                         X
                       Address Section
      CAPAC            Capacitance – Not
        93             currently used by
                       Qwest
   CARFACCKT           Carrier’s Facility                                        X
      33d              Circuit - Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       DLRQ DLR Query
                       Section
                       DLRR DLR                                                        X
                       Response Section
    CARRNAME           Carrier Name –                                                                                                X*
       47l             Qwest-Specific
                       Field – SAR
                       Carrier Section




                                                                                 23
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                     Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                           LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description       Address     Appointment         CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                            Validation     (APT)                             Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                              (AV)                                              (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                             (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry          I   R        I       R       I     R   I    R    I       R      I     R   I     R   I     R        I       R    I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
    CARRNUM            Number of Carriers
       47j             – Qwest-Specific
                       Field SAR Carrier
                       Section – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
     CBLOCK            Consecutive Block                                                                                                           X
       46d             – Qwest-Specific
                       Field – TNAQ TN
                       Information
                       Section
        CC             Company Code –       X       X        X       X                           X   X                                             X   X    X   X     X       X
         6             AVQ, AVR, AAQ,
                       AAR, ASQ, ASR,
                       FAQ, FAR,
                       TNAQ, TNAR,
                       TNSQ**, TNSR**,
                       CTQ, CTR, LQQ,
                       LQR
                       Administrative
                       Sections




                                                                                   24
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description       Address     Appointment         CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service               TN       Cancel      Loop
                                            Validation     (APT)                             Availability     Point      Loop   Availability       Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                              (AV)                                              (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)              (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                             (MPQ)      (RLD)                                               (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry          I   R        I       R       I     R   I    R    I       R      I     R   I     R   I       R          I       R    I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
      CCNA             Customer Carrier     X       X        X       X   X     X   X     X       X   X      X    X    X    X        X       X          X   X    X   X     X       X
        1              Name
                       Abbreviation –
                       AVQ, AVR, AAQ,
                       AAR, ASQ, ASR,
                       CFAQ, CFAR,
                       DLRQ, DLRR,
                       FAQ, FAR, MPQ,
                       MPR, RLDQ,
                       RLDR, SAQ, SAR,
                       TNAQ, TNAR,
                       TNSQ**, TNSR**,
                       CTQ, CTR, LQQ,
                       LQR,
                       Administrative
                       Sections
    CC64FLAG           64kbps Clear                                                                  X
       35n             Capable ability -
                       Qwest-Specific
                       Field – FAR ISDN
                       Loop Qualification
                       Section
      CFAST            CFA Status -                                                                  X
       34ab            Qwest-Specific
                       Field – FAR
                       Private Line or
                       Frame Relay
                       Section
      CHAN             Channel - Qwest-                                                          X
       34i             Specific Field –
                       FAQ CFA Section



                                                                                   25
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                    Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                          LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description       Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                            Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                              (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                           (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry          I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I       R    I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
    CHAN/PAIR          Channel/Pair –
       88              Not currently
                       used by Qwest
       CIC             Carrier ID –                                                                                                  X*
       47k             Qwest-Specific
                       Field – SAR
                       Carrier Section
       CITY            City – AVQ           X
        30             City/State Section

                       AVR Exact Match              X
                       Section
                       AVR Multiple and          X*
                       Near Match
                       Section
                       FAQ Telephone                                                       X*
                       Number Address
                       Circuit Indicator
                       Section
                       RLDQ Address                                                                                 X
                       Section
                       RLDR Raw Loop                                                                                     X*
                       Data Section
                       TNAQ Address                                                                                                              X
                       Section
                       LQQ Query by                                                                                                                                 X
                       Address Section
                       LQR Address                                                                                                                                          X
                       Response Section




                                                                                 26
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                      Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                            LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description       Address     Appointment         CFA        DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                            Validation     (APT)                              Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                              (AV)                                               (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                              (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry          I   R        I       R       I     R    I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I     R      I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
   CKTFORMAT           Circuit ID Format                                            X
       33a             Type - Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       DLRQ DLR Query
                       Section
                       DLRR DLR                                                           X
                       Response Section
    CKTID/CLO          Circuit ID/Circuit                                      X*
       32v             Layout Order
                       Number - Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       CFAR Cable Pair
                       Units Section
    COMPDATE           Completion Date -                             X
       41g             Qwest-Specific
                       Field – AAR
                       Appointment
                       Confirmation
                       Section
                       ASR Appointment                               X
                       Confirmation
                       Section
    COMPTIME           Completion Time                               X
       41h             - Qwest-Specific
                       Field – AAR
                       Appointment
                       Confirmation
                       Section
                       ASQ Appointment                       X
                       Selection Section




                                                                                    27
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                    Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                          LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description       Address     Appointment       CFA        DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                            Validation     (APT)                            Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                              (AV)                                             (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                            (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry          I   R        I     R       I     R    I    R    I       R      I     R   I     R   I     R        I     R      I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
                       ASR Appointment                             X
                       Confirmation
                       Section
        CS             Class of Service –                                                       X
        60             FAQ RPL or RFR
                       Section
     CURACT            Current Activity -                                    X*
       32s             Qwest-Specific
                       Field – CFAR
                       Cable Pair Units
                       Section
   CUSTOMIND           Custom Indicator                                                                                                              X
       46i             – Qwest-Specific
                       Field – TNAR TN
                       Response Section
         D             Diversity                                             X*
        32u            Indicator - Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       CFAR Cable Pair
                       Units Section
       DESC            Description -                                                                X*
        35r            Qwest-Specific
                       Field – FAR ISDN
                       Loop Qualification
                       Section
   DESCRIPTIVE         Descriptive               X*
       35a             Address - Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       AVR Remark
                       Information
                       Section



                                                                                  28
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                  Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                        LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description      Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                           Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                             (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                          (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry         I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I     R      I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
                       AVR Remark                  X
                       Information
                       Section
    DESCNUM            Description
       35p             Number - Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       FAR ISDN Loop
                       Qualification
                       Section – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
     DLCTYPE           DLC Type – Not
        67             currently used by
                       Qwest
     DLRDTL            Design Layout                                                 X*
       33h             Record Details -
                       Qwest-Specific
                       Field – DLRR
                       DLR Response
                       Section
     DLRHDR            DLR Header -                                                  X*
       33f             Qwest-Specific
                       Field – DLRR
                       DLR Response
                       Section




                                                                                29
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description     Address     Appointment         CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service               TN       Cancel      Loop
                                          Validation     (APT)                             Availability     Point      Loop   Availability       Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                            (AV)                                              (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)              (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                           (MPQ)      (RLD)                                               (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry        I   R        I       R       I     R   I    R    I       R      I     R   I     R   I       R          I       R    I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
     D/TSENT           Date and Time      X       X        X       X   X     X   X     X       X   X      X    X    X    X        X       X          X   X              X       X
        3              Sent – AVQ, AVR,
                       AAQ, AAR, ASQ,
                       ASR, CFAQ,
                       CFAR, DLRQ,
                       DLRR, FAQ, FAR,
                       MPQ, MPR,
                       RLDQ, RLDR,
                       SAQ, SAR,
                       TNAQ, TNAR,
                       TNSQ**, TNSR**,
                       CTQ, CTR, LQQ,
                       LQR
                       Administrative
                       Sections
      DSIND            Dispatch                                                                    X*
        36             Indicator – FAR
                       POTS Section
     DSLSERV           DSL Service -                                                                                                                                    X
       34k             Qwest-Specific
                       Field – LQQ
                       Unbundled ADSL
                       Loop Section
      DSSCP            DSSC Presence –
        68             Not currently
                       used by Qwest
      DSVC             Dual Service                                                                X
       34m             Availability –
                       Qwest-Specific
                       Field – FAR POTS
                       Section



                                                                                 30
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                   Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                         LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description      Address     Appointment       CFA        DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                           Validation     (APT)                            Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                             (AV)                                             (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                           (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry         I   R        I     R       I     R    I    R    I       R      I     R   I     R   I     R        I       R    I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
      DUEDT            Due Date - Qwest-                                    X*
       32w             Specific Field –
                       CFAR Cable Pair
                       Units Section
       EAN             Existing Account
        11             Number – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
      EATN             Existing Account
       12              Telephone
                       Number – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
     EASNUM            Easy Numbers –                                                                                                            X
       46e             Qwest-Specific
                       Field – TNAQ TN
                       Information
                       Section
     ECATEG            Easy Number                                                                                                               X
       46f             Category – Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       TNAQ TN
                       Information
                       Section
      ECCKT            Exchange                                                                X
        63             Company Circuit
                       ID – FAQ
                       Telephone Number
                       Address Circuit
                       Indicator Section
                       FAR Unbundled                                                               X*
                       Loop Section


                                                                                 31
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                   Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                         LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description       Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                            Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                              (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                           (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry          I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I     R      I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
                       RLDR Raw Loop                                                                                     X*
                       Data Section
                       LQR Circuit                                                                                                                                          X*
                       Information and
                       Counters Section
                       RLDQ Circuit ID                                                                              X
                       Query Section
    ECCKTNUM           Index of                                                                                          X*
       39e             ECCKT/rows in
                       response - Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       RLDR Raw Loop
                       Data Response
                       Section
                       LQR Circuit                                                                                                                                          X
                       Information and
                       Counters Section
     ECCKTQ            ECCKT Quantity
       39d             – RLDR Raw Loop
                       Data Response
                       Section – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
                       LQR Circuit
                       Information and
                       Counters Section -
                       Not currently
                       used by Qwest




                                                                                 32
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                    Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                          LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description      Address     Appointment       CFA        DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                           Validation     (APT)                            Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                             (AV)                                             (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                           (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry         I   R        I     R       I     R    I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I       R    I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
      EJUST            Easy Word                                                                                                                 X
       46h             Justification –
                       Qwest-Specific
                       Field – TNAQ TN
                       Information
                       Section
       ELL             Equivalent Loop                                                                                                                                      X*
        79             Length– LQR
                       Loop Level Data
                       Response Section
    ERRCODE            Error Code -             X*             X*           X*        X*           X*          X*        X*          X*              X*       X*            X*
      113b             Qwest-Specific
                       Field – AVR,
                       AAR, ASR, CFAR,
                       DLRR, FAR,
                       MPR, RLDR,
                       SAR, TNAR,
                       TNSR**, CTR,
                       LQR Error Section
    ERRMESG            Error Message -          X*             X*           X*        X*           X*          X*        X*          X*              X*       X*            X*
      113c             Qwest-Specific
                       Field – AVR,
                       AAR, ASR, CFAR,
                       DLRR, FAR,
                       MPR, RLDR,
                       SAR, TNAR,
                       TNSR**, CTR,
                       LQR Error Section




                                                                                 33
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                  Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                        LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description      Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                           Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                             (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                          (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry         I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I       R    I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
     ERRNUM            Number of Errors
       113a            – Qwest-Specific
                       Field – AVR,
                       AAR, ASR, CFAR,
                       DLRR, FAR,
                       MPR, RLDR,
                       SAR, TNAR,
                       TNSR**, CTR,
                       LQR Error Section
                       – Not currently
                       used by Qwest
     EWORD             Easy Word to                                                                                                             X
       46g             Find – Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       TNAQ TN
                       Information
                       Section
       F1DT            F1 Disturber Type
        100            – Not currently
                       used by Qwest
      F1LPCP           F1 Loop                                                                                                                                             X*
        102            Composition –
                       LQR Bridge Tap
                       Section
       F1DL            F1 Disturber
        101            Location – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
       F2DL            F2 Disturber
        104            Location – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest


                                                                                34
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                   Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                         LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description      Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                           Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                             (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                          (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry         I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I       R      I     R   I     R   I     R        I     R      I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
       F2DT            F2 Disturber Type
        103            – Not currently
                       used by Qwest
      F1LPCP           F1 Loop                                                                                                                                             X*
        102            Composition –
                       LQR Bridge Tap
                       Section
      F2LPCP           F2 Loop                                                                                                                                             X*
        105            Composition –
                       LQR Bridge Tap
                       Section
     FACDES            Facility                                                               X
       34g             Designation -
                       Qwest-Specific
                       Field – FAQ CFA
                       Section
     FACTYP            Facility Type -                                                        X
       34h             Qwest-Specific
                       Field – FAQ CFA
                       Section
    FEATDESC           Feature Title –                                                                                              X*
       47g             Qwest-Specific
                       Field - SAR
                       Feature Section
    FEATMOD            Feature Modifier                                                                                             X*
       47c             – Qwest-Specific
                       Field - SAR
                       Feature Section




                                                                                35
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                    Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                          LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description      Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service            TN       Cancel      Loop
                                           Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability    Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                             (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)           (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                          (MPQ)      (RLD)                                            (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry         I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I       R       I     R      I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
    FEATNUM            Number of
       47a             Features – Qwest-
                       Specific Field -
                       SAR Feature
                       Section – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
     FEATURE           Feature ID –                                                                                                  X*
       47b             Qwest-Specific
                       Field - SAR
                       Feature Section
     FETAVA            Feature                                                                                                   X
        48             Availability –
                       SAQ Switch
                       Section
    FIRST UNIT         First Unit –                                   X
        32g            Qwest-Specific
                       Field – CFAQ
                       Cable Facility
                       Query Section
                       CFAR Cable Pair                                      X
                       Groups Section
      FRESP            Feature/Service
        49             Response – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
      FTWP             Foreign Township
       34              – Not currently
                       used by Qwest
        GA             Gauge – Not
        74             currently used by
                       Qwest


                                                                                36
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                  Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                        LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description      Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                           Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                             (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                          (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry         I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I     R      I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
   GROUPNUM            Number of CFA
      32i              Groups - Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       CFAR Cable Pair
                       Groups Section –
                       Not currently
                       used by Qwest
   HICABCONN           High Cable                                                                        X
       38f             Connection -
                       Qwest-Specific
                       Field – MPQ
                       CCRQS Section
   HIPOTSSPLIT         High POTS                                                                         X
       38d             Splitter - Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       MPQ PSRQS
                       Section
    HNRANGE            House Number             X*
      36c              Range – Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       AVR Multiple and
                       Near Match
                       Section
     HNTRES            Hunt Group
       44              Restriction – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
      HUNT             Hunt – Not
       42              currently used by
                       Qwest




                                                                                37
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                       Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                             LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description      Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service               TN       Cancel      Loop
                                           Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability       Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                             (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)              (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                          (MPQ)      (RLD)                                               (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry         I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I       R          I     R      I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
       ILD             Insertion Loss In
       108             Decibels – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
        ILL            Incremental Loop
         76            Length – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
    INFOTYPE           Information Type                                                                                          X       X
       7k              Requested –
                       Qwest-Specific
                       Field – SAQ
                       Administration
                       Section
   INQRES NBR          Inquiry Response                           X
       41j             Number – Qwest-
                       Specific Field -
                       AAR Appointment
                       Confirmation
                       Section
                       ASR Appointment                            X
                       Confirmation
                       Section
                       CTQ Confirmation                                                                                                                      X
                       Number Section
     INVMSG            Inventory                                                                              X*
       38g             Message - Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       MPR PSS Section
                       MPR CCS Section                                                                        X*




                                                                                38
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                    Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                          LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description       Address     Appointment       CFA        DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                            Validation     (APT)                            Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                              (AV)                                             (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                            (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry          I   R        I     R       I     R    I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I     R      I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
     INVSTAT           Inventory Status -                                    X*
       32k             Qwest-Specific
                       Field – CFAR
                       Cable Pair Groups
                       Section
                       MPR PSS Section                                                                          X*
                       MPR CCS Section                                                                          X*
      IPICLIS          International PIC
         53            List – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
    ISDNFLAG           Indicates if                                                                 X
       35l             facilities can
                       support ISDN -
                       Qwest-Specific
                       Field - FAR ISDN
                       Loop Qualification
                       Section
      ITEXT            Information Text                                                                                                                                      X*
        60d            – Qwest-Specific
                       Field – LQR
                       Informational
                       Section
                       RLDR                                                                                               X*
                       Informational
                       Section
      ITYPE            Information Type                                                                                                                                      X*
        60c            – Qwest-Specific
                       Field – LQR
                       Informational
                       Section



                                                                                  39
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                     Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                           LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description       Address     Appointment       CFA        DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                            Validation     (APT)                            Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                              (AV)                                             (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                            (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry          I   R        I       R     I     R    I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I     R      I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
                       RLDR                                                                                               X*
                       Informational
                       Section
    JACKNUM            Jack Number -                         X
       41a             Qwest-Specific
                       Field – AAQ WTN
                       Section
      LALOC            Listed Address
        33             Locality – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
    LAST UNIT          Last Unit - Qwest-                              X
       32h             Specific Field –
                       CFAQ Cable
                       Facility Query
                       Section
                       CFAR Cable Pair                                       X*
                       Groups Section
    LATACODE           Local Access                                                                                                   X*
       47m             Transport Area
                       Code – Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       SAR Carrier
                       Section
        LC             Location Code –
        71             Not currently
                       used by Qwest
       LCA             Location Code
        72             Address – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest



                                                                                  40
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                   Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                         LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description       Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                            Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                              (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                           (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry          I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I     R      I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
       LCI             Location Code
        70             Identifier – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
       LCL             Load Coil
        82             Location – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
       LCQ             Load Coil
        80             Quantity – LQR
                       Loop Level Data
                       Response Section -
                       Not currently
                       used by Qwest
       LCS             Local Calling
        8              Scope – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
       LCT             Load Coil Type –                                                                                  X*
        81             RLDR Raw Loop
                       Data Response
                       Section
                       LQR Load Coil                                                                                                                                        X*
                       Section
       LD1             Location             X
        23             Designator 1 -
                       AVQ Address
                       Section
                       AVR Exact Match              X
                       Section




                                                                                 41
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                  Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                        LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description      Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                           Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                             (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                          (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry         I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I       R    I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
                       AVR Supplemental         X*
                       Information
                       Section
                       AVR Multiple and         X*
                       Near Match
                       Section
                       FAQ Telephone                                                      X*
                       Number Address
                       Circuit Indicator
                       Section
                       RLDQ Address                                                                                X
                       Section
                       RLDR                                                                                             X*
                       TNAQ Address                                                                                                             X
                       Section
                       LQQ Query by                                                                                                                                X
                       Address Section
                       LQR Address                                                                                                                                         X
                       Response Section
       LD2             Location            X
        25             Designator 2 -
                       AVQ Address
                       Section
                       AVR Exact Match             X
                       Section
                       AVR Supplemental         X*
                       Information
                       Section
                       AVR Multiple and         X*
                       Near Match
                       Address Section



                                                                                42
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                  Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                        LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description      Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                           Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                             (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                          (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry         I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I       R    I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
                       FAQ Telephone                                                      X*
                       Number Address
                       Circuit Indicator
                       Section
                       RLDQ Address                                                                                X
                       Query Section
                       RLDR                                                                                             X*
                       TNAQ Address                                                                                                             X
                       Section
                       LQQ Query by                                                                                                                                X
                       Address Section
                       LQR Address                                                                                                                                         X
                       Response Section
       LD3             Location            X
        27             Designator 3 -
                       AVQ Address
                       Section
                       AVR Exact Match             X
                       Section
                       AVR Supplemental         X*
                       Information
                       Section
                       AVR Multiple and         X*
                       Near Match
                       Address Section
                       FAQ Telephone                                                      X*
                       Number Address
                       Circuit Indicator
                       Section
                       RLDQ Address                                                                                X
                       Query Section
                       RLDR                                                                                             X*

                                                                                43
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                   Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                         LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description       Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                            Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                              (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                           (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry          I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I       R    I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
                       TNAQ Address                                                                                                              X
                       Section
                       LQQ Query by                                                                                                                                 X
                       Address Section
                       LQR Address                                                                                                                                          X
                       Response Section
       LDSP            Load Spacing –
        91             Not currently
                       used by Qwest
     LINENUM           Number of Lines -
        35s            Qwest-Specific
                       Field – FAR
                       Unbundled Loop
                       Section – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
    LINESNUM           Number of Lines -                                                           X*
       35q             Qwest-Specific
                       Field – FAR ISDN
                       Loop Qualification
                       Section
    LINESTAT           Line Status –                                                               X*
       34o             Qwest-Specific
                       Field – FAR POTS
                       Section
        LL             Loop Length–                                                                                                                                         X*
        75             LQR Loop Level
                       Data Response
                       Section




                                                                                 44
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                   Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                         LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description       Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                            Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                              (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                           (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry          I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I     R      I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
       LLG             Loop Length By                                                                                                                                      X**
        78             Gauge– LQR Loop
                       Level Data
                       Response Section
      LLGQ             Loop Length by                                                                                                                                       X
       78b             Gauge Quantity –
                       Qwest-Specific
                       Field - – LQR
                       Loop Level Data
                       Response Section -
                       Not currently
                       used by Qwest
       LLT             Loop Length                                                                                                                                          X*
        73             Type– LQR Loop
                       Level Data
                       Response Section
        LM             Loop Make-Up
        69             Type – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
     LMSTAT            Loop Make-Up
       90              Status – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
      LNAME            Listed Name -        X
        28d            Qwest-Specific
                       Field – AVQ
                       Address Section
                       AVR Exact Match              X
                       Section




                                                                                 45
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                  Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                        LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description     Address     Appointment       CFA        DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                          Validation     (APT)                            Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                            (AV)                                             (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                          (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry        I   R        I     R       I     R    I    R    I       R      I     R   I     R   I     R        I     R      I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
                       AVR Remark              X*
                       Information
                       Section
      LNUM             Line Number –
        62             Not currently
                       used by Qwest
      LOAD             Loading - Qwest-                                                           X*
       35u             Specific Field -
                       FAR Unbundled
                       Loop Section
   LOADPTAMT           Load Points                                                                                      X*
      39q              Amount – Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       RLDR Raw Loop
                       Data Response
                       Section
      LOCA             Location A -                                        X
       32d             Qwest-Specific
                       Field – CFAR
                       Administrative
                       Section
                       CFAQ Cable                                    X
                       Facility Query
                       Section
                       CFAR Cable Pair                                     X*
                       Groups Section
                       CFAR Cable Pair                                     X*
                       Units Section
                       FAQ CFA Section                                                        X




                                                                                46
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                   Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                         LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description      Address     Appointment       CFA        DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                           Validation     (APT)                            Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                             (AV)                                             (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                           (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry         I   R        I     R       I     R    I    R    I       R      I     R   I     R   I     R        I     R      I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
   LOCABCONN           Low Cable                                                                          X
       38e             Connection -
                       Qwest-Specific
                       Field – MPQ
                       CCRQS Section
   LOCANFACS           Location A                                                                  X
      34w              Facility Status -
                       Qwest-Specific
                       Field – FAR
                       Private Line or
                       Frame Relay
                       Section
    LOCARMKS           Location A                                                                  X
       34x             Remarks - Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       FAR Private Line
                       or Frame Relay
                       Section
      LOCZ             Location Z -                                         X
       32e             Qwest-Specific
                       Field – CFAR
                       Administrative
                       Section
                       CFAQ Cable                                     X
                       Facility Query
                       Section
                       CFAR Cable Pair                                      X*
                       Groups Section
                       CFAR Cable Pair                                      X*
                       Units Section
                       FAQ CFA Section                                                         X



                                                                                 47
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                  Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                        LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description      Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                           Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                             (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                          (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry         I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I       R      I     R   I     R   I     R        I     R      I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
   LOCZNFACS           Location Z                                                                 X
      34y              Facility Status -
                       Qwest-Specific
                       Field – FAR
                       Private Line or
                       Frame Relay
                       Section
    LOCZRMKS           Location Z                                                                 X
       34z             Remarks - Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       FAR Private Line
                       or Frame Relay
                       Section
    LOOPCHAR           Loop                                                                   X
       34f             Characteristics
                       Qwest-Specific
                       Field – FAQ
                       Telephone Number
                       Address Circuit
                       Indicator Section
  LOOPQUALMSG          Loop                                                                                                                                                X*
       78a             Qualification
                       Message – Qwest-
                       Specific Field -
                       LQR Loop
                       Qualification
                       Response Section
    LOOPSTAT           Loop Status –                                                                                    X*
       65              RLDR Raw Loop
                       Data Response
                       Section



                                                                                48
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                  Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                        LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description      Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                           Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                             (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                          (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry         I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I     R      I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
                       LQR Loop                                                                                                                                            X*
                       Qualification
                       Response Section
   LOPOTSSPLIT         Low POTS                                                                          X
       38c             Splitter - Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       MPQ PSRQS
                       Section
       LPAC            Loop Product                                                                                                                                        X*
        106            Available Code -
                       LQR Loop
                       Qualification
                       Response Section
     LPICLIS           InterLATA PIC
       52              List – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
       LSA             Loop Speeds
       107             Available – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
       LSO             Local Service               X
        45             Office – AVR
                       Switch Section
                       FAQ Telephone                                                      X*
                       Number Address
                       Circuit Indicator
                       Section
                       MPQ                                                                               X
                       Administrative
                       Section



                                                                                49
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                       Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                             LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description      Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service               TN       Cancel      Loop
                                           Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability       Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                             (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)              (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                          (MPQ)      (RLD)                                               (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry         I   R        I       R     I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I       R          I     R      I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
                       MPR                                                                                    X
                       Administrative
                       Section
                       SAQ Switch                                                                                                X
                       Section
                       SAR Multi-Switch                                                                                                  X
                       Section
                       SAR Switch                                                                                                        X
                       Section
       LST             Local Service                        X
        56             Termination –
                       AAQ –
                       Appointment
                       Miscellaneous
                       Section
                       LQR Loop Level                                                                                                                                          X*
                       Data Response
                       Section
        LU             Length Unit – Not
        77             currently used by
                       Qwest
       LV1             Location Value 1    X
        24             – AVQ Address
                       Section
                       AVR Exact Match             X
                       Section
                       AVR Supplemental         X*
                       Information
                       Section




                                                                                50
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                   Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                         LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description       Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                            Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                              (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                           (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry          I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I       R    I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
                       FAQ Telephone                                                       X*
                       Number Address
                       Circuit Indicator
                       Section
                       RLDQ Address                                                                                 X
                       Query Section
                       RLDR                                                                                              X*
                       TNAQ Address                                                                                                              X
                       Section
                       LQQ Query by                                                                                                                                 X
                       Address Section
                       LQR Address                                                                                                                                          X
                       Response Section
       LV2             Location Value 2 -   X
        26             FAQ Address
                       Section
                       AVR Exact Match              X
                       Section
                       AVR Supplemental          X*
                       Information
                       Section
                       AVR Multiple and          X*
                       Near Match
                       Address Section
                       FAQ Telephone                                                       X*
                       Number Address
                       Circuit Indicator
                       Section
                       RLDQ Address                                                                                 X
                       Query Section
                       RLDR                                                                                              X*



                                                                                 51
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                   Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                         LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description       Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                            Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                              (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                           (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry          I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I       R    I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
                       TNAQ Address                                                                                                              X
                       Section
                       LQQ Query by                                                                                                                                 X
                       Address Section
                       LQR Address                                                                                                                                          X
                       Response Section
       LV3             Location Value 3 -   X
        28             AVQ Address
                       Section
                       AVR Exact Match              X
                       Section
                       AVR Supplemental          X*
                       Information
                       Section
                       AVR Multiple and          X*
                       Near Match
                       Address Section
                       FAQ Telephone                                                       X*
                       Number Address
                       Circuit Indicator
                       Section
                       RLDQ Address                                                                                 X
                       query Section
                       RLDR                                                                                              X*
                       TNAQ Address                                                                                                              X
                       Section
                       LQQ Query by                                                                                                                                 X
                       Address Section
                       LQR Address                                                                                                                                          X
                       Response Section




                                                                                 52
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                  Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                        LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description      Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                           Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                             (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                          (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry         I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I     R      I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
 MAKE_UP_DESC          Make Up                                                                                          X*
     39m               Description -
                       Qwest-Specific
                       Field – RLDR Raw
                       Loop Data
                       Response Section
     MCNUM             Multiple CALA
      36b              Match Number –
                       AVR Multiple
                       CALA Match
                       Address Section –
                       Not currently
                       used by Qwest
     MIXTYPE           Mixed Response                                                                                                                                      X
        6a             Type –Qwest
                       Specific Field –
                       LQR
                       Administrative
                       Section
                       RLDR                                                                                             X
                       Administrative
                       Section
     MLTDIST           MLT Distance -                                                                                   X*
       39h             Qwest-Specific –
                       RLDR Raw Loop
                       Data Response
                       Section
      MOVE             Can be Moved To                                                            X*
       35v             - Qwest-Specific
                       Field – FAR
                       Unbundled Loop
                       Section


                                                                                53
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                 Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                       LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description     Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                          Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                            (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                         (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry        I   R        I       R     I     R   I    R    I       R      I     R   I     R   I     R        I     R      I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
        MS             Market Segment –                                                                                                                           X
         7             LQQ Loop
                       Qualification
                       Query Section
   MSGTRKCKT           Message Trunk                                           X
      33e              Circuit - Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       DLRQ DLR Query
                       Section
                       DLRR DLR                                                      X
                       Response Section
     MUXLOC            MUX Location -                                                        X
       34c             Qwest-Specific
                       Field – FAQ RPL
                       or RFR Section
      MUXST            MUX Status -                                                              X
       34aa            Qwest-Specific
                       Field – FAR
                       Private Line or
                       Frame Relay
                       Section
        NC             Network Channel                     X                                                                                                      X
        57             Code AAQ
                       Miscellaneous
                       Section
                       LQQ Section
       NCI             Network Channel                                                                                                                            X
       58              Interface Code
                       LQQ Section




                                                                               54
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                    Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                          LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description       Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                            Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                              (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                           (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry          I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I     R      I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
      NCTN             Non-Cancelled                                                                                                                          X*
       37b             Telephone
                       Number – Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       Non-Cancelled TN
                       Section
      NDISC            Non-Recurring                                                                                                 X*
       47i             Discount
                       Percentage –
                       Qwest-Specific
                       Field -SAR Feature
                       Section
      NITEQ            Number of
       60a             Information Text
                       Entries – Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       LQR
                       Informational
                       Section – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
                       RLDR                                                                                              X
                       Informational
                       Section
     NMNUM             Near Match
       36a             Number – Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       AVR Multiple &
                       Near Match
                       Address Section –
                       Not currently
                       used by Qwest


                                                                                 55
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                    Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                          LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description       Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                            Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                              (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                           (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry          I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I       R    I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
    NONPREM            Non Premises                                X
       1b              Work Time -
                       Qwest-Specific
                       Field – AAR
                       Administrative
                       Section
       NPA             Preferred NPA –                                                                                                           X
       46a             Qwest-Specific
                       Field – TNAQ TN
                       Information
                       Section
     NPA/NXX           NPA/NXX –                                                                                                                 X
        46             TNAQ TN
                       Information
                       Section
                       LQR Circuit                                                                                                                                          X*
                       Information and
                       Counters Section
   NPANXXNUM           Number of
       47o             NPA/NXXs –
                       Qwest-Specific
                       Field – SAR Multi-
                       Switch Section –
                       Not currently
                       used by Qwest
      NRATE            Non-Recurring                                                                                                 X*
       47f             Retail Rate –
                       Qwest-Specific
                       Field – SAR
                       Feature Section




                                                                                 56
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                    Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                          LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description        Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                             Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                               (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                            (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry           I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I       R    I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
      NSTN             Non-Selected                                                                                                                   X
       49e             Telephone
                       Number – Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       TNSR Non-
                       Selected TNs
                       Section**
     NTNUM             Nearby Telephone                                                                                                           X
       46c             Number – Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       TNAQ TN
                       Information
                       Section
   NUMDLRDTL           Number of Design
      33g              Layout Record
                       Details - Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       DLRR DLR
                       Response Section –
                       Not currently
                       used by Qwest
      NUMPT            Number of Ports -
       34e             Qwest-Specific
                       Field – FAQ
                       Telephone Number
                       Address Circuit
                       Indicator Section –
                       Not currently
                       used by Qwest




                                                                                  57
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                  Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                        LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description      Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                           Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                             (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                          (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry         I   R        I        R    I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I       R    I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
    NUMSLOTS           Number of Slots -
       41d             Qwest-Specific
                       Field – AAR
                       Appointment
                       Availability
                       Section – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
       NXX             Preferred NXX –                                                                                                          X
       46b             Qwest-Specific
                       Field – TNAQ TN
                       Information
                       Section
     ORDNUM            Order Number -                                                             X*
       34u             Qwest-Specific
                       Field – FAR POTS
                       Pending Order
                       Section
   OTHERUSOCS          Other USOCs -                        X*
       41c             Qwest-Specific
                       Field – AAQ WTN
                       Section
 PAIR_GAIN_TYPE        Pair Gain Type -                                                                                 X*
       39o             Qwest-Specific
                       Field – RLDR Raw
                       Loop Data
                       Response Section
  PAIR_NUMBER          Pair Number -                                                                                    X*
       39p             Qwest-Specific
                       Field – RLDR Raw
                       Loop Data
                       Response Section


                                                                                58
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                   Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                         LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description      Address     Appointment       CFA        DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                           Validation     (APT)                            Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                             (AV)                                             (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                           (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry         I   R        I     R       I     R    I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I     R      I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
    PCTAVAIL           Percent Available                                    X*
       32m             - Qwest-Specific
                       Field – CFAR
                       Cable Pair Groups
                       Section
   PDORDERDD           Pending Order                                                               X*
      34v              Due Date - Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       FAR POTS
                       Pending Order
                       Section
   PDORDERTYP          Pending Order                                                               X*
       34t             Type - Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       FAR POTS
                       Pending Order
                       Section
    PENDNUM            Pending Order
       34s             Number - Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       FAR POTS
                       Pending Order
                       Section – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
     PGPRES            Pair Gain/DLC                                                                                                                                        X*
       66              Presence – LQR
                       Loop Level Data
                       Response Section
      PICLIS           InterLATA PIC
        51             List – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest

                                                                                 59
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                      Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                            LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description       Address     Appointment         CFA        DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                            Validation     (APT)                              Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                              (AV)                                               (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                              (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry          I   R        I       R       I     R    I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I     R      I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
     PNARMK            Primary Number            X*
       35d             Address Remarks
                       - Qwest-Specific
                       Field – AVR
                       Message Section
   PNARMKNUM           Number of
       35c             Primary Number
                       Address Remarks
                       - Qwest-Specific
                       Field – AVR
                       Message Section –
                       Not currently
                       used by Qwest
     PNDACT            Pending Activity -                                      X*
       32t             Qwest-Specific
                       Field – CFAR
                       Cable Pair Units
                       Section
       PON             Purchase Order                        X
        7c             Number - Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       AAQ
                       Administrative
                       Section
                       AAR                                           X
                       Administrative
                       Section
                       ASQ                                   X
                       Administrative
                       Section
                       ASR                                           X
                       Administrative
                       Section

                                                                                    60
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                  Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                        LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description      Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN        Cancel      Loop
                                           Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment     (CT)     Qualificatio
                                             (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                      n
                                                                                                          (MPQ)      (RLD)                                            (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry         I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I       R     I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
                       TNAQ                                                                                                                     X
                       Administrative
                       Section
                       TNAR                                                                                                                         X
                       Administrative
                       Section
                       TNSQ**                                                                                                               X**
                       TNSR**                                                                                                                       X**
                       CTQ                                                                                                                                X
                       Administrative
                       Section
                       CTR                                                                                                                                    X
                       Administrative
                       Section
    POTSSPLIT          POTS Splitter -                                                                   X*
       38a             Qwest-Specific
                       Field – MPQ
                       PSLQQS Section
                       MPR PSS Section                                                                        X*
  POTSSPLITLOC         POTS Splitter                                                                     X
       7f              Location - Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       MPQ
                       Administrative
                       Section
                       MPR                                                                                    X
                       Administrative
                       Section




                                                                                61
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                   Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                         LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description       Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                            Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                              (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                           (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry          I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I     R      I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
  POTSSPLITNUM         Number of POTS
        7i             Split Facilities -
                       Qwest-Specific
                       Field – MPR
                       Administrative
                       Section - Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
  POTSSPLITQTY         POTS Splitter
       7g              Quantity - Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       MPQ
                       Administrative
                       Section– Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
   PRDNOTNUM           Products Not
       34q             Supported
                       Number - Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       FAR POTS Section
                       – Not currently
                       used by Qwest
   PRDNOTSUPP          Products Not                                                                X*
       34p             Supported -
                       Qwest-Specific
                       Field – FAR POTS
                       Section




                                                                                 62
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                  Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                        LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description      Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                           Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                             (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                          (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry         I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I     R      I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
      PREM             Premises Work                              X
       1c              Time - Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       AAR
                       Administrative
                       Section
      PRESPC           Provider
        114            Response – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
     PRESPD            Provider
       115             Response
                       Description – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
PRIMARY NPANXX         Primary NPA-                                                                                X
      63a              NXX – Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       Circuit ID Query
                       Section
  PRODNOTNUM           Products Not
      34q              Supported
                       Number – Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       FAR POTS Section
                       – Not currently
                       used by Qwest
   PRODNOTSUP          Product Not                                                                X
       34r             Supported –
                       Qwest-Specific
                       Field – FAR POTS
                       Section


                                                                                63
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                  Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                        LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description      Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                           Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                             (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                          (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry         I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I       R      I     R   I     R   I     R        I     R      I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
       QLR             Quantity of Lines                                                      X
        7e             Requested -
                       Qwest-Specific
                       Field – FAQ
                       Administrative
                       Section
                       FAR                                                                        X
                       Administrative
                       Section
                       LQQ Unbundled                                                                                                                               X
                       ADSL Loop
                       Section
     QNCNUM            Quantity of Non-
       37a             Cancelled
                       Telephone
                       Numbers – Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       CTR Non-
                       Cancelled TNs
                       Section – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
     QNSNUM            Quantity of Non-
       49d             Selected Numbers
                       – Qwest-Specific
                       Field – TNSR
                       Non-Selected TNs
                       Section** Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest




                                                                                64
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                     Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                           LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description       Address     Appointment       CFA        DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                            Validation     (APT)                            Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                              (AV)                                             (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                            (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry          I   R        I     R       I     R    I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I     R      I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
        QR             Quantity
        39             Requested – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
    QTYSPARE           Quantity Spare -                                      X*
       32l             Qwest-Specific
                       Field – CFAR
                       Cable Pair Groups
                       Section
    QUALEXIST          Qualify Existing -                                                                                                                            X
       34j             Qwest-Specific
                       Field – LQQ
                       Unbundled ADSL
                       Loop Section
    RANGEIND           Range Indicator –         X*
       36d             Qwest-Specific
                       Field – AVR
                       Multiple and Near
                       Match Section
    RATEZONE           Rate Zone –                  X
       35h             Qwest-Specific
                       Field – AVR
                       Switch Section
      RDISC            Recurring                                                                                                      X*
       47h             Discount
                       Percentage –
                       Qwest-Specific
                       Field - SAR
                       Feature Section
     REMARK            Remark – Qwest-                                                              X*
       34p             Specific Field –
                       FAR POTS Section
                       -

                                                                                  65
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                   Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                         LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description       Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                            Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                              (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                           (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry          I   R        I       R     I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I     R      I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
    REMINDER           Dual Service                                                                X
       34n             Reminder –
                       Qwest-Specific
                       Field – FAR POTS
                       Section
     REQNUM            Requested                             X
        41             Number – AAQ
                       WTN Section
                       Requested                             X
                       Number – ASQ
                       Appointment
                       Selection Section
                       TNAR Availability                                                                                                            X
                       Response Section
     REQUAL            Re-qualification –                                                                                                                           X
       33i             LQQ Query by
                       WTN Section
  REQUALEMAIL          Re-qualification                                                                                                                             X
      33j              Contact Email –
                       LQQ Query by
                       WTN Section
      RESID            Response
       10              Identifier – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
      RESPC            Response Code –
       112             Not currently
                       used by Qwest
      RESPD            Response
       113             Description – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest


                                                                                 66
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                    Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                          LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description    Address     Appointment        CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service             TN       Cancel      Loop
                                         Validation     (APT)                            Availability     Point      Loop   Availability     Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                           (AV)                                             (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)            (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                         (MPQ)      (RLD)                                             (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry       I    R       I      R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R          I     R      I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
    RESPONSE           Response Type -                           X
       7a              Qwest-Specific
                       Field – AAR
                       Administrative
                       Section
                       ASR                                       X
                       Administrative
                       Section
                       CFAR                                                X
                       Administrative
                       Section
                       DLRR                                                          X
                       Administrative
                       Section
                       FAR                                                                       X
                       Administrative
                       Section
                       MPR                                                                                   X
                       Administrative
                       Section
                       RLDR                                                                                            X
                       Administrative
                       Section
                       SAR                                                                                                            X
                       Administrative
                       Section
                       TNAR                                                                                                                         X
                       Administrative
                       Section
                       TNSR                                                                                                                         X
                       Administrative
                       Section**


                                                                               67
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                  Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                        LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description      Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                           Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                             (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                          (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry         I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I       R    I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
                       CTR                                                                                                                                   X
                       Administrative
                       Section
                       LQR                                                                                                                                                 X
                       Administrative
                       Section
      ROUTE            Rural Route –       X
       28b             Qwest-Specific
                       Field – AVQ
                       Address Section
                       AVR Exact Match             X
                       Section
                       AVR Multiple and         X*
                       Near Match
                       Section
                       FAQ Telephone                                                      X*
                       Number Address
                       Circuit Indicator
                       Section
                       RLDQ Address                                                                                X
                       Query Section
                       RLDR Raw Loop                                                                                    X
                       Data Section
                       TNAQ Address                                                                                                             X
                       Section
                       LQQ Query by                                                                                                                                X
                       Address Section
                       LQR Response                                                                                                                                        X
                       Address Section




                                                                                68
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                    Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                          LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description       Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                            Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                              (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                           (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry          I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I     R      I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
      RRATE            Recurring Retail                                                                                              X*
       47e             Rate – Qwest-
                       Specific Field SAR
                       Feature Section
     RSUIND            Remote Switch                                                                                                                                        X*
       111             Unit Indicator–
                       LQR Loop Level
                       Data Response
                       Section
       RTF             Receive/Transmit
        99             Indicator – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
     SAGMESS           Street Address               X
       21c             Guide Message -
                       Qwest-Specific
                       Field – AVR Exact
                       Match Section
      SANO             Service Address      X
       16              Number – AVQ
                       Address Section
                       AVR Exact Match           X
                       AVR Multiple &            X*
                       Near Match
                       Address Section
                       FAQ Telephone                                                       X*
                       Number Address
                       Circuit Indicator
                       Section
                       RLDQ Address                                                                                 X
                       Query Section



                                                                                 69
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                  Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                        LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description      Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                           Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                             (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                          (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry         I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I       R    I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
                       RLDR Raw Loop                                                                                    X*
                       Data Section
                       TNAQ Address                                                                                                             X
                       Section
                       LQQ Query by                                                                                                                                X
                       Address Section
                       LQR Address                                                                                                                                         X
                       Response Section
      SANOR            Service Address
        17             Number Range –
                       Not currently
                       used by Qwest
       SAPR            Service Address     X
        15             Number Prefix –
                       AVQ Address
                       Section
                       AVR Exact Match             X
                       Section
                       AVR Multiple &           X*
                       Near Match
                       Address Section
                       FAQ Telephone                                                      X*
                       Number Address
                       Circuit Indicator
                       Section
                       RLDQ Address                                                                                X
                       Query Section
                       RLDR Raw Loop                                                                                    X*
                       Data Section
                       TNAQ Address                                                                                                             X
                       Section



                                                                                70
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                   Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                         LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description       Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                            Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                              (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                           (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry          I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I       R    I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
                       LQQ Query by                                                                                                                                 X
                       Address Section
                       LQR Address                                                                                                                                          X
                       Response Section
       SASD            Service Address      X
        19             Street Directional
                       Prefix – AVQ
                       Address Section
                       AVR Exact Match              X
                       Section
                       AVR Multiple &            X*
                       Near Match
                       Address Section
                       FAQ Telephone                                                       X*
                       Number Address
                       Circuit Indicator
                       Section
                       RLDQ Address                                                                                 X
                       Query Section
                       RLDR Raw Loop                                                                                     X*
                       Data Section
                       TNAQ Address                                                                                                              X
                       Section
                       LQQ Query by                                                                                                                                 X
                       Address Section
                       LQR Address                                                                                                                                          X
                       Response Section
       SASF            Service Address      X
        18             Number Suffix –
                       AVQ Address
                       Section



                                                                                 71
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                  Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                        LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description      Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                           Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                             (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                          (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry         I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I       R    I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
                       AVR Exact Match             X
                       Section
                       AVR Multiple and         X*
                       Near Match
                       Section
                       FAQ Telephone                                                      X*
                       Number Address
                       Circuit Indicator
                       Section
                       RLDQ Address                                                                                X
                       Query Section
                       RLDR Raw Loop                                                                                    X*
                       Data Section
                       TNAQ Address                                                                                                             X
                       Section
                       LQ Query by                                                                                                                                 X
                       Address Section
                       LQR Address                                                                                                                                         X
                       Response Section
       SASN            Service Address     X
        20             Street Name –
                       AVQ Address
                       Section
                       AVR Exact Match             X
                       Section
                       AVR Multiple and         X*
                       Near Match
                       Section
                       FAQ Telephone                                                      X*
                       Number Address
                       Circuit Indicator
                       Section


                                                                                72
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                   Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                         LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description       Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                            Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                              (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                           (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry          I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I       R    I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
                       RLDQ Address                                                                                 X
                       Query Section
                       RLDR Raw Loop                                                                                     X*
                       Data Section
                       TNAQ Address                                                                                                              X
                       Section
                       LQQ Query by                                                                                                                                 X
                       Address Section
                       LQR Address                                                                                                                                          X
                       Response Section
       SASS            Service Address      X
        22             Street Directional
                       Suffix – AVQ
                       Address Section
                       AVR Exact Match              X
                       Section
                       AVR Multiple and          X*
                       Near Match
                       Section
                       FAQ Telephone                                                       X*
                       Number Address
                       Circuit Indicator
                       Section
                       RLDQ Address                                                                                 X
                       Query Section
                       RLDR Raw Loop                                                                                     X*
                       Data Section
                       TNAQ Address                                                                                                              X
                       Section
                       LQQ Query by                                                                                                                                 X
                       Address Section



                                                                                 73
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                  Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                        LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description      Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                           Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                             (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                          (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry         I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I       R    I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
                       LQR Address                                                                                                                                         X
                       Response Section
      SATH             Service Address     X
       21              Street Type –
                       AVQ Address
                       Section
                       AVR Exact Match             X
                       Section
                       AVR Multiple &           X*
                       Near Match
                       Address Section
                       FAQ Telephone                                                      X*
                       Number Address
                       Circuit Indicator
                       Section
                       RLDQ Address                                                                                X
                       Query Section
                       RLDR Raw Loop                                                                                    X*
                       Data Section
                       TNAQ Address                                                                                                             X
                       Section
                       LQQ Query by                                                                                                                                X
                       Address Section
                       LQR Address                                                                                                                                         X
                       Response Section
     SCATEG            Search Category -                                        X
       5b              Qwest-Specific
                       Field – DLRQ
                       Administrative
                       Section




                                                                                74
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                  Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                        LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description      Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                           Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                             (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                          (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry         I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I       R      I     R   I     R   I     R        I       R    I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
                       DLRR                                                           X
                       Administrative
                       Section
                       FAQ                                                                    X
                       Administrative
                       Section
                       FAR                                                                        X
                       Administrative
                       Section
                       TNAQ TN                                                                                                                  X
                       Information
                       Section
                       TNAR Availability                                                                                                            X
                       Response Section
   SEARCHTYP           Search Type -       X
       5a              Qwest-Specific
                       Field – AVQ
                       Administrative
                       Section
                       CFAQ                                           X
                       Administrative
                       Section
                       CFAR                                                 X
                       Administrative
                       Section
                       MPQ                                                                               X
                       Administrative
                       Section
                       MPR                                                                                    X
                       Administrative
                       Section



                                                                                75
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                    Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                          LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description        Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                             Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                               (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                            (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry           I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I       R      I     R   I     R   I     R        I       R    I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
      SECNCI           Secondary
        59             Network Channel
                       Interface Code –
                       Not currently
                       used by Qwest
  SEGMENTNUM           Segment Number                                                                                     X*
      39j              - Qwest-Specific
                       Field – RLDR Raw
                       Loop Data
                       Response Section
  SEGMENTQTY           Segment Quantity
      39i              - Qwest-Specific
                       Field – RLDR Raw
                       Loop Data
                       Response Section –
                       Not currently
                       used by Qwest
     SELNUM            CLEC Selected                                                                                                              X
       49c             Telephone
                       Number – Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       TNSQ Selected
                       TNs Section**
      SERCD            Hi Capacity or                                                           X
        34a            Design Service
                       Facilities - Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       FAQ RPL or RFR
                       Section




                                                                                  76
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                  Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                        LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description      Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                           Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                             (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                          (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry         I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I       R    I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
   SERNUMCKT           Serial Number                                            X
       33b             Circuit - Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       DLRQ DLR Query
                       Section
                       DLRR DLR                                                       X
                       Response Section
     SERVON            Served On -                                                                X*
       35t             Qwest-Specific
                       Field – FAR
                       Unbundled Loop
                       Section
      SITEID           Site ID - Qwest-            X
        35f            Specific Field –
                       AVR Switch
                       Section
                       CTQ – Admin                                                                                                                       X
                       Section
                       CTR – Admin                                                                                                                           X
                       Section
                       TNAQ TN                                                                                                                  X
                       Information
                       Section
                       TNAR Availability                                                                                                            X
                       Response Section
                       TNSQ – Admin                                                                                                             X
                       Section
                       TNSR – Admin                                                                                                                 X
                       Section




                                                                                77
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                   Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                         LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description       Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                            Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                              (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                           (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry          I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I     R      I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
      SLRMK            Service Location             X
        35e            Remarks - Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       AVR Message
                       Section
       SMC             Spectrum
        64             Management
                       Classes – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
       SNR             Selected Numbers
       49b             Returned –
                       Qwest-Specific
                       Field – TNRQ
                       Selected TNs
                       Section**- Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
    SN56FLAG           Switched Net 56                                                             X
       35m             Capability -
                       Qwest-Specific
                       Field – FAR ISDN
                       Loop Qualification
                       Section
       SSC             Single Subscriber
        98             carrier Indicator
                       – Not currently
                       used by Qwest
      STATE            State/Province –     X
        31             AVQ City/State
                       Section
                       AVR Exact Match              X
                       Section

                                                                                 78
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                     Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                           LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description      Address     Appointment       CFA        DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service            TN       Cancel      Loop
                                           Validation     (APT)                            Availability     Point      Loop   Availability    Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                             (AV)                                             (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)           (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                           (MPQ)      (RLD)                                            (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry         I   R        I     R       I     R    I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I       R       I       R    I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
                       AVR Multiple and         X*
                       Near Match
                       Section
                       FAQ Telephone                                                       X*
                       Number Address
                       Circuit Indicator
                       Section
                       RLDQ Address                                                                                 X
                       Section
                       RLDR Raw Loop                                                                                     X*
                       Data Section
                       SAQ Address                                                                                                X
                       Section
                       SAR Feature                                                                                                    X*
                       Section
                       TNAQ Address                                                                                                               X
                       Section
                       LQQ Query by                                                                                                                                  X
                       Address Section
                       LQR Address                                                                                                                                           X
                       Response Section
      SUBDF            Sub Division                                         X*
       32p             From – Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       CFAR Cable Pair
                       Units Section
      SUBDT            Sub Division To -                                    X
       32q             Qwest-Specific
                       Field – CFAR
                       Cable Pair Units
                       Section



                                                                                 79
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                    Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                          LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description       Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                            Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                              (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                           (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry          I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I     R      I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
   SUPPORTED           Switch Support –                                                                                              X*
      47d              Qwest-Specific
                       Field - SAR
                       Feature Section
     SVCCFG            Service
       61              Configuration –
                       Not currently
                       used by Qwest
   SWITCHNUM           Number of
       47n             Switches – Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       SAR Multi-Switch
                       Section– Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
      SWIND            Switch Indicator -        X*
       35k             Qwest-Specific
                       Field – AVR
                       Switch Section
      SWTYP            Switch Type -             X*
        35j            Qwest-Specific
                       Field – AVR
                       Switch Section
     SWTYPE            Switch Type –                                                                                                 X*
       47p             Qwest-Specific
                       Field – SAR Multi-
                       Switch Section




                                                                                 80
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                    Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                          LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description        Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                             Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                               (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                            (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry           I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I       R      I     R   I     R   I     R        I     R      I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
   SWTYPNUM            Switch Type
      35i              Number – Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       AVR Switch
                       Section – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
        TC             Taper Code – Not
        109            currently used by
                       Qwest
   TELNUMCKT           Telephone                                                  X
       33c             Number Circuit -
                       Qwest-Specific
                       Field – DLRQ
                       DLR Query
                       Section
                       DLRR DLR                                                         X
                       Response Section
   TERMINAL ID         Terminal ID -                                                                                      X*
       39k             Qwest-Specific
                       Field – RLDR Raw
                       Loop Data
                       Response Section
 TNADDRCKTIND          TN, Address or                                                           X                                                                    X
      34d              Circuit Indicator -
                       Qwest-Specific
                       Field – FAQ
                       Telephone Number
                       Address Circuit
                       Indicator Section
                       RLDQ Raw Loop                                                                                 X
                       Data Section


                                                                                  81
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                    Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                          LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description       Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                            Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                              (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                           (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry          I   R        I       R     I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I       R      I       R    I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
    TNCOUNT            Telephone
       49a             Number Count –
                       Qwest-Specific
                       Field – TNAR TN
                       Response Section –
                       Not currently
                       used by Qwest
      TNRES            Telephone                                                                                                                     X
        43             Number Response
                       – TNAR TN
                       Response Section
                       CTQ Telephone                                                                                                                 X*
                       Number Section
     TNTYPE            Telephone                                                                                                                 X
       40              Number Type –
                       TNAQ TN
                       Information
                       Section
                       TNAR Availability                                                                                                             X
                       Response Section
       TOS             Type of Service –                     X
        89             AAQ Subscriber
                       Section
                       SAQ Switch                                                                                                 X
                       Section
                       LQQ Section                                                                                                                                  X




                                                                                 82
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                  Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                        LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description      Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                           Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                             (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                          (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry         I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I       R    I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
      TOTAL            Total Non                                  X
        1d             Premises/Premises
                       Work Time -
                       Qwest-Specific
                       Field – AAR
                       Administrative
                       Section
      TPRDI            Third Party ,                                                                                                                                       X*
       29a             Resale or DSL –
                       Qwest Specific
                       Field
                       LQR Circuit
                       Information and
                       Counters Section
                       RLDR Raw Loop                                                                                    X*
                       Data Section
      TRMED            Transmission
        89             Medium Type –
                       Not currently
                       used by Qwest
       TTA             Traffic                     X
       35g             Terminating Area
                       - Qwest-Specific
                       Field – AVR
                       Switch Section
                       TNAQ TN                                                                                                                  X
                       Information
                       Section
                       TNAR Availability                                                                                                            X
                       Response Section




                                                                                83
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                       Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                             LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description    Address     Appointment         CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service               TN       Cancel      Loop
                                         Validation     (APT)                             Availability     Point      Loop   Availability       Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                           (AV)                                              (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)              (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                          (MPQ)      (RLD)                                               (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry       I    R       I       R       I     R   I    R    I       R      I     R   I     R   I       R          I       R    I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
                       TNSQ                                                                                                                         X
                       Administrative
                       Section
                       TNSR                                                                                                                             X
                       Administrative
                       Section
                       CTQ                                                                                                                          X
                       Administrative
                       Section
                       CTR                                                                                                                              X
                       Administrative
                       Section
       TYPE            Transport                                                                                                                                       X
        64a            Protocol Type –
                       Qwest-Specific
                       Field – LQQ
                       Section
      TXACT            Transaction       X        X       X       X   X     X   X     X       X   X      X    X    X    X        X       X          X   X    X   X     X       X
        5              Activity – All
                       Administrative
                       Sections +
                       TNSQ** and
                       TNSR**
     TXNUM             Transaction       X        X       X       X   X     X   X     X       X   X      X    X    X    X        X       X          X   X    X   X     X       X
       2               Number – All
                       Administrative
                       Sections +
                       TNSQ** and
                       TNSR**




                                                                                84
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description      Address     Appointment         CFA        DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service               TN       Cancel      Loop
                                           Validation     (APT)                              Availability     Point      Loop   Availability       Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                             (AV)                                               (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)              (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                             (MPQ)      (RLD)                                               (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry         I   R        I       R       I     R    I    R    I       R      I     R   I     R   I       R          I       R    I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
      TXTYP            Transaction Type    X       X        X       X   X     X    X     X       X   X      X    X    X    X        X       X          X   X    X   X     X       X
        4              – All
                       Administrative
                       Sections +
                       TNSQ** and
                       TNSR**
      TYCA             Type of Cable –
       92              Not currently
                       used by Qwest
       UNIT            Unit - Qwest-                                          X*
        32o            Specific Field –
                       CFAR Cable Pair
                       Units Section
                       RLDR Raw Loop                                                                                       X*
                       Data Section
    UNITNUM            Number of Units -
       32n             Qwest-Specific
                       Field – CFAR
                       Cable Pair Units
                       Section – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
      USOC             Universal Service                                                         X
       34b             Order Code -
                       Qwest-Specific
                       Field – FAQ RPL
                       or RFR Section
    USOCNUM            Number of Other
       41b             USOCs - Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       AAQ WTN Section
                       – Not currently
                       used by Qwest

                                                                                   85
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                   Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                         LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description       Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                            Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                              (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                           (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry          I   R        I       R     I     R   I    R    I       R      I     R   I     R   I     R        I     R      I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
     WCCLLI            Wire Center                                                                                       X*
      39g              CLLI – Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       RLDR Raw Loop
                       Data Response
                       Section
       WCN             Wire Center
       110             Name – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
     WLINUM            Working Lines                                                               X
       34l             Left In – Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       FAR POTS Section
      WSOPI            Working Service
       55              on Premises
                       Indicator – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
       WTN             Working              X
        54             Telephone
                       Number – AVQ
                       WTN Section
                       AAQ WTN Section                       X
                       FAQ Telephone                                                           X
                       Number Address
                       Circuit Indicator
                       Section
                       RLDQ Raw Loop                                                                                X*
                       Data Query Section




                                                                                 86
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                   Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                         LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description       Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                            Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                              (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                           (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry          I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I     R      I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
                       RLDR Raw Loop                                                                                     X*
                       Data Response
                       Section
                       LQQ Query by                                                                                                                                 X
                       WTN Section
                       LQR Circuit                                                                                                                                          X*
                       Information and
                       Counters Section
       WTN             Working                                                                                                                                              X*
       60b             Telephone
                       Number – Qwest-
                       Specific Field
                       LQR Informational
                       Section
                       RDLR                                                                                              X*
                       Informational
                       Section
      WTNQ             Working 10-digit
       39b             Telephone
                       Number Quantity
                       - Qwest-Specific
                       Field – Not
                       currently used by
                       Qwest
                       AVR Exact Match
                       Section
                       RLDQ Raw Loop
                       Data Query Section




                                                                                 87
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                    Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                          LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description        Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                             Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                               (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                            (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry           I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I     R      I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
     WTNNUM            Number of                                                                                     X
       39c             Working
                       Telephone
                       Numbers - Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       RLDQ Raw Loop
                       Data Query Section
    WTNSTAT            WTN Status –               X*
      39f              Qwest-Specific
                       Field – AVR Exact
                       Match Section
     X75FLAG           X75 Capability                                                               X
       35m             Identifier - Qwest-
                       Specific Field –
                       FAR ISDN Loop
                       Qualification
                       Section
        ZIP            Zip/Postal Code –     X
        32             AVQ City/State
                       Section
                       AVR Exact Match               X
                       Section
                       AVR Multiple and           X*
                       Near Match
                       Section
                       FAQ Telephone                                                        X*
                       Number Address
                       Circuit Indicator
                       Section
                       RLDQ Address                                                                                  X
                       Section



                                                                                  88
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                                                                                                 Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                                                                                       LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Name & Number        Description     Address     Appointment       CFA       DLR    Facility        Meet       Raw     Service           TN       Cancel      Loop
                                          Validation     (APT)                           Availability     Point      Loop   Availability   Assignment    (CT)     Qualificatio
                                            (AV)                                            (FA)          Query      Data      (SA)          (TNA)                     n
                                                                                                         (MPQ)      (RLD)                                           (LQ)
                       I = Inquiry        I   R        I     R       I     R   I    R    I      R       I     R   I     R   I     R        I       R    I   R    I        R
                       R = Response
                       RLDR Raw Loop                                                                                   X*
                       Data Section
                       TNAQ Address                                                                                                            X
                       Section
                       LQ Query by                                                                                                                                X
                       Address Section
                       LQQ Query by                                                                                                                               X
                       WTN Section
                       LQR Address                                                                                                                                        X
                       Response Section




                                                                               89
     * This field may repeat
     ** This field, in the Telephone Number Select Query (TNSQ) and Response (TNSR) transactions is required when using the Qwest GUI and optional when using XML.
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



4.0   DATA ELEMENT DESCRIPTIONS


 1.   CCNA - Customer Carrier Name Abbreviation
      Identifies the RSID for Resellers or ZCID for Interconnectors. The RSID or ZCID is assigned
      by Qwest and provided to the CLEC during the negotiation process. The customer is required
      to specify the RSID or ZCID on all requests.

      VALID ENTRIES:


            RULE #                         Products                         Valid Entries
              1               All Products except:                    Format must be ANN where
                               Facility Based Directory               A = alphanumeric and N =
                                   Listings (FBDL)                     numeric.
                2              Facility Based Directory              A valid CCNA or ACNA
                                   Listings (FBDL)                     (Access Carrier Name
                                                                       Abbreviation).
                                                                      Three alpha characters

        NOTE 1:        This field must be used for Inquiries and Responses.

       USAGE:          This field is required.

       Transaction    R/O/C     Valid Entries           Business Rules
       Type
                      I   R     I                R
       All + TNSQ     R   R     See VALID
       & TNSR**                 ENTRIES.


      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          3 alphanumeric characters

      EXAMPLE:            A     T   X

                          Z     9   9




                                             90
                                                                            Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                  LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



1a.   APPTACT – Appointment Activity – Qwest-Specific Field
      Identifies the first or new appointment.

            NOTE 1:      This field may be used on Inquires.

       USAGE:           This field is required.

       Transaction Type
                                    R/O/C         Valid Entries                 Business Rules
                                    I R             I        R                        I                  R
       AAQ – Administrative         R            N = New             If the entry in this field = N, a
       Section                                                       new calendar will be shown.
       AAR – Administrative              R
       Section

      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           1 alpha character

       EXAMPLE:              N




                                                 91
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



1b.   NONPREM – Non Premises Work Time – Qwest-Specific Field
      Identifies the length of time, which must be scheduled to perform work not done on a
      customer’s premises.

           NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

       USAGE:           This field is required.

       Transaction
       Type                   R/O/C               Valid Entries                 Business Rules
                             I     R              I          R              I                    R
       AAR –                       R                     0-9999
       Administrative
       Section

      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          4 numeric characters

       EXAMPLE:             0    0    1    2




                                               92
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



1c.   PREM – Premises Work Time – Qwest-Specific Field
      Identifies the length of time that must be scheduled to perform work done on a customer’s
      premises.

           NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

       USAGE:           This field is required.

       Transaction
       Type                   R/O/C               Valid Entries                 Business Rules
                             I     R              I          R              I                    R
       AAR –                       R                     0-9999
       Administrative
       Section

      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          4 numeric characters

       EXAMPLE:             0    0    1    2




                                               93
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



1d.   TOTAL – Total Non-Premises/Premises Work Time – Qwest-Specific
      Field
      Identifies the total amount of time that must be scheduled for an appointment.

           NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

       USAGE:           This field is required.

       Transaction Type
                                 R/O/C         Valid Entries                 Business Rules
                                 I R       I          R            I                 R
       AAR –                         R         0-9999                  Entry must equal the sum of
       Administrative                                                  NONPREM and PREM time.
       Section

      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                         4 numeric characters

       EXAMPLE:             0    0    2    4




                                               94
                                                                     Effective October 25, 2010
                                                           LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



2.   TXNUM - Transaction Number
     Identifies the customer provided tracking number to link the inquiry with the response.

       NOTE 1:         CLEC generated and may be reused one month after initial inquiry.

       NOTE 2:         This field may be used for Inquiries and Responses.

      USAGE:           This field is required.

      Transaction Type            R/O/C      Valid          Business Rules
                                             Entries
                                  I    R
      All + TNSQ & TNSR**         R    R

     DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                        22 alphanumeric characters

     EXAMPLE:
      8   2   4 Z 9




                                             95
                                                                             Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                   LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



3.   D/TSENT - Date and Time Sent
     XML: DT TM SENT

     Identifies the date and time the transaction is sent.

            NOTE 1:         This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

     VALID ENTRIES:

            U.S. Standard                                       Metric Format

            Two Digit Month (01-12) – Not currently             Two Digit Century (00-99)
            used by Qwest
            Two Digit Day (01-31) – Not currently used          Two Digit Year (00-99)
            by Qwest
            Two Digit Century (00-99) – Not currently           Two Digit Month (01-12)
            used by Qwest
            Two Digit Year (00-99) – Not currently used         Two Digit Day (01-31)
            by Qwest
            Two Digit Hour (01-12) – Not currently used         Two Digit Hour (01-12) - Not currently
            by Qwest                                            used by Qwest
                                                                Two Digit Hour (01-24)
            Two Digit Minute (00-59) – Not currently            Two Digit Minute (00-59)
            used by Qwest
            AM or PM – Not currently used by Qwest              AM or PM – Not currently used by Qwest


      USAGE:               This field is required.

          Transaction Type
                                     R/O/C                    Valid Entries                  Business
                                                                                               Rules
                                     I   R           I                       R               I      R
      ALL + TNSQ &                   R   R    See VALID               See VALID
      TNSR**                                  ENTRIES.                ENTRIES.

     DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                                12 alphanumeric characters

     EXAMPLE:

      2    0   0   1   1     2   2   3   0   8   1    5




                                                 96
                                                                     Effective October 25, 2010
                                                           LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



4.   TXTYP - Transaction Type
     Identifies the type of transaction.

           NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

     VALID ENTRIES:

             A    =   Address Validation
             B    =   Telephone Number Assignment
             C    =   Feature/Service Availability
             D    =   Appointment Scheduling
             E    =   Customer Service Information (CSI) – Not currently used by Qwest
             F    =   Loss Alert with Request for Transition Information – Not currently used by
                      Qwest
             G    =   Loss Alert with No Request for Transition Information – Not currently used
                      by Qwest
             H    =   Loop Qualification Query
             L    =   Inter/IntraLATA Availability – Not currently used by Qwest
             M    =   CSI including Listings (E and T)
             R    =   Raw Loop Data Query – Qwest-specific field
             S    =   Service Configuration Inquiry – Not currently used by Qwest
             T    =   Listing(s) for Telephone Number – Not currently used by Qwest
             U    =   Unbundled Loop Products with coordinated install – Qwest-Specific entry

      USAGE:            This field is required.

        Transaction Type
                                R/O/C                  Valid Entries                  Business
                                                                                        Rules
                                I    R                         I                R     I      R
      Address Validation        R    R     A = Address Validation
      Appointment               R    R     D = Appointment Scheduling non-
      Availability                         UBL Products
                                           U = Unbundled Loop Products with
                                           coordinated install
                                           C = Batch Hot Cut
      Appointment               R    R     D = Appointment Scheduling non-
      Selection                            UBL Products
                                           U = Unbundled Loop Products with
                                           coordinated install
                                           C = Batch Hot Cut
      CFA                       R    R     C = CFA Validation
      DLR                       R    R     L = DLR
      Facility Availability     R    R     H = Facility Availability
      Meet Point                R    R     M = Meet Point Query




                                              97
                                                             Effective October 25, 2010
                                                   LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120




4.    TXTYP - Transaction Type (continued)


       Transaction
          Type       R/O/C                Valid Entries                  Business Rules
                     I R                I                  R             I           R
     Raw Loop Data   R R     R = Raw Loop Data
                             Query
     SA              R   R   C = Service & Feature
                             Availability
     TNA             R   R   B = Telephone
                             Number Inquiry
     TNS**           R   R   B = Telephone           B = Telephone   This field    This field
                             Number Query            Number Query    is required   is required
                                                                     in this       in this
                                                                     section       section
                                                                     when          when
                                                                     using the     using the
                                                                     Qwest         Qwest
                                                                     GUI and       GUI and
                                                                     optional      optional
                                                                     when          when
                                                                     using         using
                                                                     XML.          XML.
     Cancel          R   R   B = Telephone
                             Number Inquiry
                             D = Appointment
                             Scheduling
     Loop            R   R   H = Loop
     Qualification           Qualification Query

     DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                1 alpha character

     EXAMPLE:        A




                                    98
                                                                     Effective October 25, 2010
                                                           LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



5.   TXACT - Transaction Activity
     Identifies the pre-order transaction activity.

           NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

     VALID ENTRIES:

             A    =   New Inquiry
             C    =   Confirmation of Selection or Reservation – Qwest-specific field
             K    =   Cancels Selection or Reservation
             E    =   Selection
             R    =   Reservation

      USAGE:            This field is required.

      Transaction Type
                               R/O/C               Valid Entries                Business Rules
                               I R             I                 R                I          R
      Address                  R R       A = New Inquiry
      Validation
      Appointment              R    R    A = New Inquiry   R = Reservation
      Availability
      Appointment              R    R    E = Selection     C=
      Selection                                            Confirmation of
                                                           Selection or
                                                           Reservation
      CFA                      R    R    A = New Inquiry   A = New Inquiry
      DLR                      R    R    A = New Inquiry
      Facility                 R    R    A = New Inquiry   A = New Inquiry
      Availability
      Meet Point Query         R    R    A = New Inquiry
      Raw Loop Data            R    R    A = New Inquiry   A = New Inquiry
      SA                       R    R    A = New Inquiry   A = New Inquiry
      TNA                      R    R    A = New Inquiry   R = Reservation




                                              99
                                                                    Effective October 25, 2010
                                                          LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120




5.    TXACT - Transaction Activity (continued)


      Transaction
         Type        R/O/C               Valid Entries                    Business Rules
                     I R            I                 R                 I                R
     TNS**           R R         E=           C=                This field is     This field is
                                 Selection Confirmation of      required in this required in this
                                              selection or      section when      section when
                                              reservation.      using the         using the
                                                                Qwest GUI,        Qwest GUI,
                                                                optional when     optional when
                                                                using XML.        using XML.
     Cancel          R       R   K=          K = Cancel
                                 Cancel      Section
                                 Section
     Loop            R       R   A = New
     Qualification               Inquiry

     DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                       1 alpha character

     EXAMPLE:            A




                                           100
                                                                            Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                  LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



5a.   SEARCHTYP – Search Type – Qwest-Specific Field
      Identifies whether a telephone number or an address is used to validate a specific address.

           NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

       USAGE:           This field is required.

       Transaction
       Type                R/O/C                      Valid Entries                 Business Rules
                           I R                    I                   R                 I               R
       AVQ                 R          T = TN
       Administrative                 A = Address
       Section
       CFAQ                R          G = Cable Group
       Administrative                 U = Cable Unit
       Section
       CFAR                      R                             G = Cable
       Administrative                                          Group
       Section                                                 U = Cable
                                                               Unit
       MPQ                 R          P = POTSSPLIT                           The entry in this field
       Administrative                 List                                    must = P or S when
       Section                        C = CABCONN                             the POTSSPLITLOC
                                      List                                    field = O.
                                      S = POTSSPLIT
                                      RANGE                                   The entry in this field
                                      R = CABCONN                             must be C or R when
                                      Range                                   the
                                                                              POTTSSPLITLOC
                                                                              field = I.
       MPR                       R
       Administrative
       Section

      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                              1 alphanumeric character

      EXAMPLE:            T




                                             101
                                                                             Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                   LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



5b.   SCATEG – Search Category – Qwest-Specific Field
      Identifies what type of search is being done.

           NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

       USAGE:           This field is conditional.

            Transaction Type
                                        R/O/C                  Valid Entries                Business
                                                                                              Rules
                                        I    R                 I                  R         I      R
       DLRQ Administrative              R            L = DLR
       Section
       DLRR Administrative                   R
       Section
       FAQ Administrative               R            P = POTS, PAL
       Section                                       D = Design Service
                                                     (DS0)
                                                     H = Hi Capacity
                                                     (DS1, DS3)
                                                     I = ISDN
                                                     U = Unbundled
                                                     Loop
       FAR Administrative                    R
       Section
       TNAQ TN Information              R            P = POTS (Default)
       Section                                       B = Basic PAL
                                                     S = Smart PAL
       TNAR Availability                     C                                P = POTS
       Response Section                                                       B = Basic
                                                                              PAL
                                                                              S = Smart
                                                                              PAL

      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           1 alphanumeric character

      EXAMPLE:             P




                                             102
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



6.   CC - Company Code
     Identifies the Exchange Carrier generating the inquiry.

        NOTE 1:         This field may be used on Inquires

        NOTE 1:        The format and structure of this field is defined by ANSI in document
                       T1.251, Identification of Telecommunications Service Provider Codes for
                       the North American Telecommunications System.

     VALID ENTRIES:
                 COMMON LANGUAGE EC Code - A four alpha character code, which
                 identifies providers in North America, maintained by Telcordia Technologies.

                 Company Code - A four alphanumeric character code, which identifies providers
                 in the United States and certain U. S. territories, maintained by NECA.

       NOTE 1:         Valid EC codes are outlined in Telcordia Technologies practice BR 751-
                       100-112.

       NOTE 2:         Valid Company Codes are available from NECA.

      USAGE:           This field is optional.

        Transaction Type
                                R/O/C         Valid Entries                     Business Rules
                                I R               I               R         I                 R
      Address Validation        O O       See VALID
                                          ENTRIES.
      Appointment               O    O    See VALID
      Availability                        ENTRIES.
      Appointment               O    O    See VALID
      Selection                           ENTRIES.
      Facility Availability     O    O    See VALID
                                          ENTRIES.
      TNA**                     O    O
      TNS**                     O    O    See VALID
                                          ENTRIES.
      Cancel                    O    O    See VALID
                                          ENTRIES.
      Loop Qualification        O    O    See VALID
                                          ENTRIES.

     DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          4 alphanumeric characters

     EXAMPLE:            1     2    A     3




                                              103
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



7.   MS - Market Segment
     Identifies whether the request is for Resale or UNE.

          NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires.

      USAGE:           This field is required.

          Transaction Type
                                    R/O/C           Valid Entries             Business Rules
                                    I R                 I         R                I              R
      LQQ Loop Qualification        R            A = Resale           For Qwest Broadband
      Query Section                              B = Unbundled        qualification queries, MS
                                                                      must = A.

                                                                      For all other queries, MS
                                                                      must = B.

     DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          1 alphanumeric character

     EXAMPLE:            A




                                            104
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



7a.   RESPONSE – Response Type – Qwest-Specific Field
      Identifies if a good, bad or mixed response is being returned.

           NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

       USAGE:           This field is required.

                      Transaction Type
                                                           R/O/C           Valid Entries     Business
                                                                                               Rules
                                                           I    R      I           R          I    R
       AAR, ASR, CFAR, DLRR, FAR, MPR,                          R           G = Good
       SAR,                                                                 B = Bad
       LQR, RLDR, TNAR, TNSR, Cancel -                          R           G = Good
       Administrative Sections                                              B = Bad
                                                                            M = Mixed
                                                                            (Mixed means
                                                                            that the
                                                                            number of
                                                                            TNs requested
                                                                            could not be
                                                                            returned; as
                                                                            many TNs as
                                                                            possible are
                                                                            returned along
                                                                            with an error
                                                                            message)

      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                        1 alphanumeric character

      EXAMPLE:            G




                                             105
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



7b.   MIXTYPE - Mixed Response Type – Qwest-Specific Field
      This field categorizes the type of mixed response returned.

           NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

       USAGE:           This field is conditional.

                     Transaction Type
                                                           R/O/C        Valid Entries   Business Rules
                                                           I R      I          R        I       R
       LQR Administrative Section, RDLR                        C         P = Partial        If RESPONSE
                                                                                            = M, then
                                                                         response
                                                                                            MIXTYPE is
                                                                                            required


      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          1 alphanumeric character

      EXAMPLE:            P




                                             106
                                                                                    Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                          LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



7c.   PON – Purchase Order Number – Qwest-Specific Field
      Identifies the customer’s unique purchase order or requisition number that authorizes the
      issuance of this request.

           NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

       USAGE:           This field is conditional.

               Transaction Type
                                                  R/O/C                Valid                       Business Rules
                                                                      Entries
                                                  I       R       I          R                       I                  R
       AAQ Administrative Section                 R                                    PON is used to associate
                                                                                       the appointment that is
                                                                                       scheduled to the LSR and
                                                                                       therefore the same PON
                                                                                       must be used on both the
                                                                                       LSR and Appointment
                                                                                       Reservation. If the same
                                                                                       PON is not used on both,
                                                                                       the appointment may be
                                                                                       returned to the pool of
                                                                                       available resources while
                                                                                       the LSR is processing.
       ASQ, TNSQ Administrative Section           R
       AAR, ASR Administrative Section            O       O
       CTQ                                        C                                    Required if TXTYP = D.
       Administrative Section                                                          Required if TXTYP = B,
                                                                                       and PON is populated on
                                                                                       TNAQ/TNAR.
       CTR, TNAR, TNSR                                    C                Echo                                    Required if
       Administrative Section                                              from                                    PON
                                                                           Query                                   populated on
                                                                                                                   query.
       TNAQ                                       C                                    Required if CBLOCK,
       Administrative Section                                                          EASNUM, ECATEG,
                                                                                       EWORD or EJUST are
                                                                                       populated, otherwise
                                                                                       optional.
       TNSQ                                       C                                    Required if PON is
       Administrative Section                                                          populated on
                                                                                       TNAQ/TNAR.

      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                               16 alphanumeric characters

      EXAMPLE:           O      V   F   1     3       5       3       4      0     1




                                             107
                                                                    Effective October 25, 2010
                                                          LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



7d.   ACNA – Access Carrier Name Abbreviation – Qwest-Specific Field
      Identifies the COMMON LANGUAGE code of the CLEC for this request.

           NOTE 1:     This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

       USAGE:         This field is required.

          Transaction Type
                                     R/O/C       Valid Entries             Business Rules
                                     I   R        I        R                 I              R
       DLRQ Administrative           R                             The value in this
       Section                                                     field cannot be
                                                                   equal to the value
                                                                   in the CCNA field.
       CFAR, CFAQ                          R
       Administrative Section

      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                      3 alphanumeric characters

      EXAMPLE:         A     T   X




                                           108
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



7e.   QLR – Quantity of Lines Requested – Qwest-Specific Field
      Identifies the number of lines needed for this request.

            NOTE 1:      This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

      VALID ENTRIES:
               1-99, if checking facilities for Point A and/or Point Z on point-to-point RPL.
               2-99, if checking facilities for multiple circuits at the same address for Multi-Point
               RPL.

       USAGE:           This field is conditional.

        Transaction Type
                               R/O/C      Valid Entries                     Business Rules
                               I R            I         R                 I                   R
       FAQ                     R         See VALID              Must be greater
       Administrative                    ENTRIES.               than 0 when the
       Section                                                  SCATEG field = P,
                                                                D, H, or I.

                                                                Must = 0 when the
                                                                SCATEG field = U.
       FAR                          R
       Administrative
       Section
       LQQ Unbundled           O         1-99                   Optional for
       ADSL Loop                                                unbundled ADSL,
       Section                                                  otherwise ignore.

      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          2 numeric characters

      EXAMPLE:            0    5




                                             109
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



7f.   POTSSPLITLOC – POTS Splitter Location – Qwest-Specific Field
      Identifies the location of the POTS splitter.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

       USAGE:            This field is required.

          Transaction Type
                                    R/O/C                   Valid Entries               Business
                                                                                          Rules
                                    I    R              I                   R           I      R
       MPQ Administrative           R          I = Inside
       Section                                 Collocation Cage
                                               O = Outside
                                               Collocation Cage
       MPR Administrative                 R                          I = Inside
       Section                                                       Collocation Cage
                                                                     O = Outside
                                                                     Collocation Cage

      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           1 alpha character

      EXAMPLE:            O




                                              110
                                                                       Effective October 25, 2010
                                                             LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



7g.   POTSSPLITQTY – POTS Splitter Quantity – Qwest-Specific Field
      Identifies the number of POTS Splitters.

       USAGE:           Populated by Qwest.

         Transaction Type
                                R/O/C            Valid Entries            Business Rules
                                I R                  I         R              I                R
       MPQ Administrative       N         1-5
       Section

      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                         1 numeric character

      EXAMPLE:           2




                                           111
                                                                       Effective October 25, 2010
                                                             LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



7h.   CABCONNQTY – Cable Connection Quantity – Qwest-Specific Field
      Identifies the number of Cable Connections.

       USAGE:          Populated by Qwest.

         Transaction Type
                                R/O/C          Valid Entries              Business Rules
                                I R                I         R                I                R
       MPQ Administrative       N        1-5
       Section

      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                         1 numeric character

      EXAMPLE:           2




                                           112
                                                                  Effective October 25, 2010
                                                        LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



7i.   POTSSPLITNUM – Number of POTS Split Facilities – Qwest-Specific
      Field – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies the number of POTS Split facilities.




                                             113
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



7j.   CABCONNNUM – Number of Cable Connection Facilities – Qwest-
      Specific Field – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies the number of Cable Connection Facilities.




                                            114
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



7k.   INFOTYPE – Information Type Requested – Qwest-Specific Field
      Identifies the type of switch (single or multiple).

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

       USAGE:            This field is required.

         Transaction
            Type              R/O/C     Valid Entries                       Business Rules
                              I R           I        R                           I                    R
       SAQ                    R        M = Multi            The multi version of this query is used
       Administrative                  S = Single           only for a multi-switch LSO (returned
       Section                                              from AVR) to retrieve the different
                                                            switch types and NPANXX list per
                                                            switch. The single version is used to
                                                            inquire on a specific NPANXX to
                                                            retrieve a list of USOCs and PICs.
       SAR                        R
       Administrative
       Section

      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          1 alpha character

      EXAMPLE:            M




                                              115
                                                                       Effective October 25, 2010
                                                             LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



8.   LCS – Local Calling Scope – Not currently used by Qwest
     Identifies the local calling scope options being requested.




                                            116
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



9.   TOS - Type of Service
     Identifies the type of service for this inquiry.

           NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires.

       NOTE 1:          The type of service identifies the end user account as business, residential,
                        government or coin.

     VALID ENTRIES:

             1st Character (type)

             1    =   Business
             2    =   Residence
             3    =   Government
             4    =   Coin
             5    =   Home Office – Not currently used by Qwest

             2nd Character (product) – Not currently used by Qwest

             A    =   Multi-line – Not currently used by Qwest
             B    =   Single Line – Not currently used by Qwest
             C    =   Coin – Not currently used by Qwest
             D    =   Advanced Services – Not currently used by Qwest
             E    =   CENTREX Resale – Not currently used by Qwest
             H    =   ISDN (BRI) – Not currently used by Qwest
             J    =   PBX (trunk) – Not currently used by Qwest
             K    =   ISDN (PRI) – Not currently used by Qwest
             L    =   XDSL – Not currently used by Qwest
             M    =    XDSL – Qwest-Specific entry
             N    =   LIDB Record Management Service – Not currently used by Qwest
             -    =   Not Applicable – Not currently used by Qwest

             3rd Character (class) – Not currently used by Qwest

             M    =   Measured Rate – Not currently used by Qwest
             F    =   Flat Rate
             G    =   Message – Not currently used by Qwest
             -    =   Not Applicable – Not currently used by Qwest

             4th Character (characterization) – Not currently used by Qwest
             F    = FXS (Foreign Exchange Service) – Not currently used by Qwest
             G = Semi-public – Not currently used by Qwest
             N = Normal – Not currently used by Qwest
             P    = Prison/Inmate – Not currently used by Qwest
             R = RCF – Not currently used by Qwest
             S    = 800 Service – Not currently used by Qwest
             W = WATS – Not currently used by Qwest
             -    = Not Applicable – Not currently used by Qwest




                                              117
                                                                              Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                    LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120




 9.             TOS - Type of Service (continued)


             USAGE:          This field is required.

Transaction Type
                     R/O/C       Valid Entries                              Business Rules
                     I R             I         R                                  I                       R
AAQ Subscriber       R       TXTYP = D:                 If the 1st character of the REQTYP = E for
Section                      1st Char:                  POTS, PBX and ISDN, M for UNE-P, or P for
                             1 = Business               CENTREX, reserved requests will be allowed
                             2 = Residence              with the request, otherwise the request will be
                             3 = Government             disallowed.
                             4 = Coin
                                                        Government is treated as business.
                             TXTYP = U:
                             1st Char:                  If the TXTYP field = D, 1st Character = 1-4.
                             1 = Business
                             2 = Residence              If the TXTYP field = U, 1st character = 1-3.
                             3 = Government

                             TXTYPE = C
                             1st Char:
                             1 = Business
                             2 = Residence
                             3 = Government
SAQ Switch           R       1st Char:                  Business or residence used to retrieve products
Section                      1 = Business               and carriers.
                             2 = Residence
                             3 = Government             Government is treated as business.
                             4 = Coin

                             2nd & 3rd Char:
                             Not populated
LQQ Loop             P                                  Not used by Qwest
Qualification
Query Section

             DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                        4 alphanumeric characters

             EXAMPLE:             1    M     F




                                                  118
                                                                       Effective October 25, 2010
                                                             LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



10.   RESID - Response Identifier – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies the response number assigned by the provider to relate subsequent activity.




                                            119
                                                                    Effective October 25, 2010
                                                          LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



11.   EAN - Existing Account Number – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies the end user’s existing account number




                                            120
                                                                      Effective October 25, 2010
                                                            LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



12.   EATN - Existing Account Telephone Number – Not currently used by
      Qwest
      Identifies the end user’s existing account telephone number.




                                            121
                                                                       Effective October 25, 2010
                                                             LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



13.   CAI - Concatenated Address Information – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies a free flowing field, which can be used to represent non-fielded address
      information.




                                            122
                                                                           Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                 LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



14.       AFT - Address Format Type
          Identifies the format of the address being supplied.

            NOTE 1:         This field may be used for Inquiries.

          VALID ENTRIES:

                  A   =    Rural route and Box number
                  B   =    Unnumbered
                  C   =    Provider assigned house number
                  D   =    Descriptive

            NOTE 1:         A value of “C” indicates a valid address where no house number exists;
                            therefore, the provider has assigned an internal house number to facilitate
                            provisioning.

           USAGE:           This field is optional.

          Transaction Type
                                    R/O/C       Valid Entries                      Business Rules
                                    I R             I         R                        I                     R
      AVQ Address Section           O         See VALID
                                              ENTRIES.
      FAQ Telephone Number          O         See VALID             Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO, SASF,
      Address Circuit Indicator               ENTRIES.              SASD, SASN, SATH, SASS, LD1,
      Section                                                       LV1, LD2, LV2, LD3, LV3, AHN,
                                                                    ROUTE, BOX, CITY, STATE, ZIP,
                                                                    CALA repeat as a group for SCATEG
                                                                    = H or D.
                                                                    If SCATEG = H or D, then the
                                                                    Telephone Number Address Circuit
                                                                    Indicator Section is required and may
                                                                    repeat up to 2 times.
                                                                    Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO, SASF,
                                                                    SASD, SASN, SATH, SASS, LD1,
                                                                    LV1, LD2, LV2, LD3, LV3, AHN,
                                                                    ROUTE, BOX, CITY, STATE, ZIP,
                                                                    CALA, LSO are a group if SCATEG =
                                                                    P, U or I.
                                                                    If SCATEG = P, U, or I, then this
                                                                    section is required and cannot repeat.
      RLDQ Address Query            O         See VALID
      Section                                 ENTRIES.
      TNAQ Address Section          O         See VALID
                                              ENTRIES.
      LQQ Query by Address          O         See VALID
      Section                                 ENTRIES.

          DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                         1 alphanumeric character

          EXAMPLE:             A



                                                 123
                                                                               Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                     LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



 15.       SAPR - Service Address Number Prefix
           Identifies the prefix for the address number of the service address.

                   NOTE 1:        This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

            USAGE:               This field is optional.

 Transaction Type     R/O/C                                         Business Rules
                      I R                                    I                                         R
AVQ - Address         O
Validation
AVR - Exact Match            O
Section
AVR - Multiple and           O
Near Match
Address Section
FAQ – Telephone       O            Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO, SASF, SASD, SASN,
Number Address                     SATH, SASS, LD1, LV1, LD2, LV2, LD3, LV3,
Circuit Indicator                  AHN, ROUTE, BOX, CITY, STATE, ZIP, CALA
Section                            repeat as a group for SCATEG = H or D.
                                   If SCATEG = H or D, then the Telephone Number
                                   Address Circuit Indicator Section is required and may
                                   repeat up to 2 times.
                                   Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO, SASF, SASD, SASN,
                                   SATH, SASS, LD1, LV1, LD2, LV2, LD3, LV3,
                                   AHN, ROUTE, BOX, CITY, STATE, ZIP, CALA,
                                   LSO are a group if SCATEG = P, U or I.
                                   If SCATEG = P, U, or I, then this section is required.
RLDQ                  O
RLDR                         O                                                              When
                                                                                            TNADDRCKTIND = A
                                                                                            and ASGNIND = U
                                                                                            (unassigned for address)
                                                                                            echo from address query.
                                                                                            This field may repeat the
                                                                                            same number of times as
                                                                                            the value in the
                                                                                            ECCKTQ field.
TNAQ Address          O
Section
LQQ Query by          O
Address Section
LQR Address                  C                                                              Populated if returned.
Response Section
                                                                                            The Address Response
                                                                                            Section, of which this
                                                                                            field is a part, is used
                                                                                            when a good response is
                                                                                            returned from a search
                                                                                            (RESPONSE field = G).




                                                      124
                                                             Effective October 25, 2010
                                                   LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



15.   SAPR - Service Address Number Prefix (continued)


      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:               5 alphanumeric characters

      EXAMPLE:       2   5   W

       NOTE 1:     Where 25W is the address number prefix for the following address
                   example: 25W 450 1/2 SW Camino Ramon Lane NW, Suite 23A, Floor 12,
                   Wing 2.




                                    125
                                                                           Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                 LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120


 16.       SANO - Service Address Number
           Identifies the number of the service address.

                  NOTE 1:     This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

            USAGE:           This field is conditional.

Transaction Type    R/O/C                                          Business Rules
                    I R                               I                                         R
AVQ - Address       C         This field is used for Numbered address
Validation                    search. CLEC must populate this field with
                              the house number of the service address for
                              numbered address search (e.g., 123 This field,
                              along with the SASF and SASN fields, give
                              the complete street address (e.g., 123-1A
                              Main).
                              Required when the SAPR or SASF field(s) are
                              populated.

                              Required if the SEARCHTYP field = A.

                              Prohibited when the ROUTE field is
                              populated.
AVR - Exact              C                                                     Value received on exact match for a
Match Section –                                                                numbered address.
WTN Section
AVR -Multiple            O                                                     If House # Range is returned on a
and Near Match                                                                 “Near Match” Response, it must be
Address Section                                                                populated within the range of the
                                                                               selected House # Range.
                                                                               This field may repeat the same
                                                                               number of times as the value in the
                                                                               NMNUM field.




                                                  126
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



  16.         SANO - Service Address Number (continued)

 Transaction Type    R/O/                                     Business Rules
                       C
                     I R                                 I                                       R
FAQ – Telephone      C       This field is used for Numbered address search.
Number Address               CLEC must populate this field with the house number
Circuit Indicator            of the service address for the numbered address search
Section                      (e.g. 123). This field along with the SASF, SASN,
                             SASD and SATH fields, gives the complete street
                             address (e.g. 123-1A North Main Street).
                             Required when the SAPR or SASF field(s) are
                             populated.

                             Prohibited if the AHN, ROUTE or BOX fields are
                             populated.
                             Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO, SASF, SASD, SASN,
                             SATH, SASS, LD1, LV1, LD2, LV2, LD3, LV3,
                             AHN, ROUTE, BOX, CITY, STATE, ZIP, CALA
                             repeat as a group for SCATEG = H or D.
                             If SCATEG = H or D, then the Telephone Number
                             Address Circuit Indicator Section is required and may
                             repeat up to 2 times.
                             Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO, SASF, SASD, SASN,
                             SATH, SASS, LD1, LV1, LD2, LV2, LD3, LV3,
                             AHN, ROUTE, BOX, CITY, STATE, ZIP, CALA,
                             LSO are a group if SCATEG = P, U or I.
                             If SCATEG = P, U, or I, then this section is required.
RLDQ                 C       Required if the TNADDRCKTIND field = A and the
                             AHN field is not populated.

                             Required if the SAPR or SASF fields are populated.
RLDR                     O                                                            When
                                                                                      TNADDRCKTIND = A
                                                                                      and ASGNIND = U
                                                                                      (unassigned for address)
                                                                                      echo from address query.
                                                                                      This field may repeat the
                                                                                      same number of times as
                                                                                      the value in the
                                                                                      ECCKTQ field.
TNAQ Address         C       Required when the AHN field is non-populated,
Section                      otherwise not applicable.

                             Required when the SAPR or SASF field(s) are
                             populated.




                                             127
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120




 16.         SANO - Service Address Number (continued)


 Transaction Type       R/O/C                                  Business Rules
                        I R                    I                                      R
LQQ Query by            C     This field is used for Numbered
Address Section               address search. CLEC must
                              populate this field with the
                              house number of the service
                              address for numbered address
                              search (e.g., 123). This field,
                              along with the SASF and SASN
                              fields, gives the complete street
                              address (e.g., 123-1A Main
                              Street).
                              Required when the SAPR or
                              SASF fields are populated.
LQR Address                 C                                    Populated if returned.
Response Section
                                                                 The Address Response Section, of which
                                                                 this field is a part, is used when a good
                                                                 response is returned from a search
                                                                 (RESPONSE field = G).

                    NOTE 1:           This field, along with SASF and SASN fields, gives the complete
                                      street address (e.g., 123-1A Main).

           DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                       8 alphanumeric characters

           EXAMPLE:
             4      5     0


             NOTE 1:          Where 450 is the address number for the following address example: 25W
                              450 1/2 SW Camino Ramon Lane NW, Suite 23A, Floor 12, Wing 2.




                                                128
                                                                     Effective October 25, 2010
                                                           LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



17.   SANOR - Service Address Number Range – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies the range or end range address number when consecutive address numbers are to be
      provided.




                                           129
                                                                              Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                    LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



  18.       SASF - Service Address Number Suffix
            Identifies the suffix for the address number of the service address.

                    NOTE 1:    This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

             USAGE:           This field is conditional.

Transaction Type      R/O/C                                       Business Rules
                      I R                                           I                                        R
AVQ - Address         C        This field is used for Numbered address search. CLEC may optionally
Validation                     populate this field with the house number suffix of the service address for
                               numbered address search (e.g., 1A or ½). The SANO field concatenated
                               with a dash with the SASF field, along with the SASN, gives the complete
                               street address (e.g., 123-1A Main).
                               Valid only if the SANO field is populated, otherwise prohibited.
AVR - Exact               O
Match Section
AVR -Multiple             O
and Near Match
Address Section
FAQ – Telephone       O        Optional when the TNADDRCKTIND field = A, and address is numbered.
Number Address                 Address must have already been validated and must be an exact match.
Circuit Indicator
Section                        Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO, SASF, SASD, SASN, SATH, SASS, LD1,
                               LV1, LD2, LV2, LD3, LV3, AHN, ROUTE, BOX, CITY, STATE, ZIP,
                               CALA repeat as a group for SCATEG = H or D.
                               If SCATEG = H or D, then the Telephone Number Address Circuit
                               Indicator Section is required and may repeat up to 2 times.
                               Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO, SASF, SASD, SASN, SATH, SASS, LD1,
                               LV1, LD2, LV2, LD3, LV3, AHN, ROUTE, BOX, CITY, STATE, ZIP,
                               CALA, LSO are a group if SCATEG = P, U or I.
                               If SCATEG = P, U, or I, then this section is required.
RLDQ                  O        Optional if the TNADDRCKTIND field = A and the address is numbered.

                               Required if the SASD, SATH or SASS fields are populated.




                                                   130
                                                                           Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                 LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120




 18.         SASF - Service Address Number Suffix (continued)


Transaction Type    R/O/C                                        Business Rules
                   I    R                           I                                       R
RLDR                    O                                                  When TNADDRCKTIND = A and
                                                                           ASGNIND = U (unassigned for
                                                                           address) echo from address query.
                                                                           This field may repeat the same
                                                                           number of times as the value in the
                                                                           ECCKTQ field.
TNAQ Address       O             Optional when the SANO field is
Section                          populated, otherwise not applicable.
LQQ Query by       O             This field is used for Numbered
Address Section                  address search. CLEC may
                                 optionally populate this field with the
                                 house number suffix of the service
                                 address for numbered address search
                                 (e.g., 1A or ½). The SANO field
                                 concatenated with a dash with the
                                 SASF field, along with the SASN,
                                 gives the complete street address
                                 (e.g., 123-1A Main Street).
                                 Valid only when the SANO field is
                                 populated, otherwise prohibited.
LQR Address              C                                                 Populated if returned.
Response Section
                                                                           The Address Response Section, of
                                                                           which this field is a part, is used
                                                                           when a good response is returned
                                                                           from a search (RESPONSE field =
                                                                           G).

             NOTE 1:   The SANO field concatenated with a dash with the SASF field, along with the
                       SASN field, gives the complete street address (e.g., 123-1A Main).

            DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                       4 alphanumeric characters

           EXAMPLE:          1     /    2

             NOTE 1:      Where 1/2 is the address number suffix for the following address example:
                          25W 450 1/2 SW Camino Ramon Lane NW, Suite 23A, Floor 12, Wing 2.




                                                131
                                                                               Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                     LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



 19.       SASD - Service Address Street Directional Prefix
           Identifies the street directional prefix for the service address.

                 NOTE 1:         This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

           VALID ENTRIES:
                    N     =     North
                    S     =     South
                    E     =     East
                    W     =     West
                    NE    =     Northeast
                    NW    =     Northwest
                    SE    =     Southeast
                    SW    =     Southwest

            USAGE:              This field is conditional.

 Transaction Type     R/O/C                                         Business Rules
                      I R                                     I                                       R
AVQ - Address         O
Validation
AVR - Exact Match           O
Section
AVR -Multiple and           O
Near Match
Address Section
FAQ – Telephone       O           Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO, SASF, SASD, SASN,
Number Address                    SATH, SASS, LD1, LV1, LD2, LV2, LD3, LV3,
Circuit Indicator                 AHN, ROUTE, BOX, CITY, STATE, ZIP, CALA
Section                           repeat as a group for SCATEG = H or D.
                                  If SCATEG = H or D, then the Telephone Number
                                  Address Circuit Indicator Section is required and may
                                  repeat up to 2 times.
                                  Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO, SASF, SASD, SASN,
                                  SATH, SASS, LD1, LV1, LD2, LV2, LD3, LV3,
                                  AHN, ROUTE, BOX, CITY, STATE, ZIP, CALA,
                                  LSO are a group if SCATEG = P, U or I.
                                  If SCATEG = P, U, or I, then this section is required.
RLDQ                  O
RLDR                        O                                                              When
                                                                                           TNADDRCKTIND =
                                                                                           A and ASGNIND = U
                                                                                           (unassigned for
                                                                                           address) echo from
                                                                                           address query.
                                                                                           This field may repeat
                                                                                           the same number of
                                                                                           times as the value in the
                                                                                           ECCKTQ field.




                                                     132
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120




 19.         SASD - Service Address Street Directional Prefix (continued)


 Transaction Type    R/O/C                                   Business Rules
                     I R                               I                                         R
TNAQ Address         O
Section
LQQ Query by         O
Address Section
LQR Address              C                                                            Populated if returned.
Response Section
                                                                                      The Address Response
                                                                                      Section, of which this
                                                                                      field is a part, is used
                                                                                      when a good response
                                                                                      is returned from a
                                                                                      search (RESPONSE
                                                                                      field = G).

           DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                    2 alpha characters

           EXAMPLE:          S   W

           NOTE 1:   Where SW is the street directional prefix for the following address example: 25W
                     450 1/2 SW Camino Ramon Lane NW, Suite 23A, Floor 12, Wing 2.




                                              133
                                                                           Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                 LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



20.       SASN - Service Address Street Name
          Identifies the street name of the service address.

                NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

           USAGE:           This field is conditional.

      Transaction Type       R/O/C                             Business Rules
                             I R                                  I                                           R
      AVQ - Address          C         Required when the SEARCHTYP field = A.
      Validation
                                       Required when the SASD, SATH or SASS fields are populated.

                                       Use this field to determine type of address search:

                                       Numbered:
                                       Does not begin with a comma (,) and is populated with a street
                                       name. Example: Broadway

                                       SANO must be populated and SASF may be populated. The AHN,
                                       ROUTE or ROUTE and BOX field cannot be populated.

                                       Unnumbered:
                                       Begins with a comma (,) followed by a street name or the
                                       community name, or with double commas (,,) followed by the
                                       community name. Example: ,Vail. In addition, one of the following
                                       fields is required: AHN, ROUTE, ROUTE and BOX, or LNAME.

                                       Descriptive:
                                       Begins with a comma (,) followed by a description of the address.
                                       Example: , Mission Apts

                                       The following fields cannot be populated: LD1, LV1, LD2, LV2,
                                       LD3, LV3, LNAME, AHN, ROUTE, ROUTE and BOX and
                                       LNAME
                                       The CITY, STATE and ZIP or CALA fields must be populated for
                                       all of the three above address searches. This field is required when
                                       SASD or SATH or SASS are populated.
      AVR - Exact                 C
      Match Section
      AVR -Multiple               O
      and Near Match
      Address Section




                                                 134
                                                                    Effective October 25, 2010
                                                          LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120




20.        SASN - Service Address Street Name (continued)

  Transaction Type   R/O/C                                 Business Rules
                     I   R                                     I                                       R
 FAQ – Telephone     C       Required if the TNADDRCKTIND field = A. Address must have
 Number Address              already been validated and must be exact match.
 Circuit Indicator           Required when the SASD, SATH or SASS fields are populated.
 Section
                             Use this field to determine the type of address search:
                             Numbered:
                             Does not begin with a comma (,) and it is populated with a street name.
                             Example: Broadway
                             SANO must be populated and SASF may be populated.
                             AHN, ROUTE or ROUTE and BOX fields cannot be populated.
                             Unnumbered:
                             Begins with a comma (,), followed by a street name or the community
                             name, or with double commas (,,) followed by the community name.
                             Example: , Vail
                             In addition, one of the following fields is required: AHN,
                             ROUTE or ROUTE and BOX.
                             Descriptive:
                             Begins with a comma (,), followed by a description of the address.
                             Example: , Mission Apts
                             The following fields cannot be populated: LD1, LV1, LD2, LV2, LD3,
                             LV3, AHN, ROUTE, or ROUTE and BOX.
                             The CITY, STATE and ZIP CODE or CALA must be populated for all
                             of the above address searches.

                             Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO, SASF, SASD, SASN, SATH, SASS, LD1,
                             LV1, LD2, LV2, LD3, LV3, AHN, ROUTE, BOX, CITY, STATE,
                             ZIP, CALA repeat as a group for SCATEG = H or D.
                             If SCATEG = H or D, then the Telephone Number Address Circuit
                             Indicator Section is required and may repeat up to 2 times.
                             Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO, SASF, SASD, SASN, SATH, SASS, LD1,
                             LV1, LD2, LV2, LD3, LV3, AHN, ROUTE, BOX, CITY, STATE,
                             ZIP, CALA, LSO are a group if SCATEG = P, U or I.
                             If SCATEG = P, U, or I, then this section is required.
 RLDQ                C       Required if the TNADDRCKTIND field = A.
                             Required if the SASD, SATH or SASS fields are populated.
 TNAQ Address        R       Required when the SASD, SATH or SASS fields are populated.
 Section




                                         135
                                                                       Effective October 25, 2010
                                                             LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



20.       SASN - Service Address Street Name (continued)

  Transaction Type   R/O/C                                    Business Rules
                     I R                              I                                          R
 LQQ Query by        C       Use field to determine type of address search:
 Address Section             Numbered: Does not begin with a comma. “,”
                             and is populated with a street name. Example:
                             Broadway.
                             SANO must be populated and SASF may be
                             populated. AHN, ROUTE or ROUTE and BOX
                             field cannot be populated.
                             Unnumbered: Begins with a comma “,”followed
                             by a street name or the community name, or with
                             double commas ", , " followed by the community
                             name. Example: ,Vail.
                             In addition, one of the following fields is required:
                             AHN, or ROUTE, or ROUTE and BOX.
                             Descriptive: Begins with a comma “,” sign
                             followed by a description of the address.
                             Example: , Mission Apts.
                             The following fields cannot be populated: LD1,
                             LV1, LD2, LV2, LD3, LV3, AHN, ROUTE,
                             ROUTE and BOX.

                             The CITY, STATE and ZIP or CALA must be
                             populated for all of these three searches.
                             This field is required when SASD, or SATH, or
                             SASS are populated.
                             Prohibited if any one of the following fields is
                             populated: LD1, LV1, LD2, LV2, LD3, LV3,
                             AHN, ROUTE, or ROUTE and BOX.
 LQR Address            C                                                            Populated if returned.
 Response Section
                                                                                     The Address Response
                                                                                     Section, of which this
                                                                                     field is a part, is used
                                                                                     when a good response is
                                                                                     returned from a search
                                                                                     (RESPONSE field = G).




                                            136
                                                               Effective October 25, 2010
                                                     LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120




20.    SASN - Service Address Street Name (continued)

      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                 50 alphanumeric characters

      EXAMPLES:
      C A M I N O            R A M O N



      NOTE 1:   Where Camino Ramon is the address street name for the following address
                example: 25W 450 1/2 SW Camino Ramon Lane NW, Suite 23A, Floor 12, Wing
                2.

      O N E        C   I   T Y     C E N T E R




                                      137
                                                                              Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                    LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120


 21.       SATH - Service Address Street Type
           Identifies the thoroughfare portion of the street name of the service address.
                   NOTE 1:        This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

           VALID ENTRIES:
                      Recommended abbreviations are contained in the United States Postal Service
                      Publication 28, Postal Addressing Standards, Street Suffix Abbreviations Section.
            USAGE:               This field is optional.

 Transaction Type      R/O/                                         Business Rules
                         C
                       I R                                  I                                         R
AVQ - Address          O
Validation
AVR - Exact Match            O
Section
AVR -Multiple and            O                                                         AVR and FAQ
Near Match Address
Section
FAQ – Telephone        O           Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO, SASF, SASD, SASN,
Number Address                     SATH, SASS, LD1, LV1, LD2, LV2, LD3, LV3,
Circuit Indicator                  AHN, ROUTE, BOX, CITY, STATE, ZIP, CALA
Section                            repeat as a group for SCATEG = H or D.
                                   If SCATEG = H or D, then the Telephone Number
                                   Address Circuit Indicator Section is required and
                                   may repeat up to 2 times.
                                   Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO, SASF, SASD, SASN,
                                   SATH, SASS, LD1, LV1, LD2, LV2, LD3, LV3,
                                   AHN, ROUTE, BOX, CITY, STATE, ZIP,
                                   CALA, LSO are a group if SCATEG = P, U or I.
                                   If SCATEG = P, U, or I, then this section is
                                   required.
RLDQ                   O
RLDR                         O                                                         When TNADDRCKTIND = A
                                                                                       and ASGNIND = U
                                                                                       (unassigned for address) echo
                                                                                       from address query.
                                                                                       This field may repeat the same
                                                                                       number of times as the value
                                                                                       in the ECCKTQ field.
TNAQ Address           O
Section
LQQ Query by           O
Address Section
LQR Address                  C                                                         Populated if returned.
Response Section
                                                                                       The Address Response
                                                                                       Section, of which this field is a
                                                                                       part, is used when a good
                                                                                       response is returned from a
                                                                                       search (RESPONSE field =
                                                                                       G).



                                                      138
                                                                   Effective October 25, 2010
                                                         LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



21.   SATH - Service Address Street Type (continued)


      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                     10 alphanumeric characters

      EXAMPLE:           L    N

      NOTE 1: Where LN is the address street name type for the following address example: 25
              W 4501/2 SW Camino Ramon Lane NW, Suite 23A, Floor 12, Wing 2.




                                         139
                                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



         22.        SASS - Service Address Street Directional Suffix
                    Identifies the street directional suffix for the street service address.
                          NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

                    VALID ENTRIES:
                             N     =   North
                             S     =   South
                             E     =   East
                             W     =   West
                             NE    =   Northeast
                             NW    =   Northwest
                             SE    =   Southeast
                             SW    =   Southwest

                     USAGE:            This field is optional.

Transaction Type    R/O/C                                                  Business Rules
                    I R                                             I                                                 R
AVQ - Address       O
Validation
AVR - Exact              O
Match Section
AVR -Multiple            O
and Near Match
Address Section
FAQ – Telephone     O          Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO, SASF, SASD, SASN, SATH, SASS,
Number Address                 LD1, LV1, LD2, LV2, LD3, LV3, AHN, ROUTE, BOX, CITY,
Circuit Indicator              STATE, ZIP, CALA repeat as a group for SCATEG = H or D.
Section
                               If SCATEG = H or D, then the Telephone Number Address Circuit
                               Indicator Section is required and may repeat up to 2 times.
                               Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO, SASF, SASD, SASN, SATH, SASS,
                               LD1, LV1, LD2, LV2, LD3, LV3, AHN, ROUTE, BOX, CITY,
                               STATE, ZIP, CALA, LSO are a group if SCATEG = P, U or I.
                               If SCATEG = P, U, or I, then this section is required.
RLDQ                O
RLDR                     O                                                                               When
                                                                                                         TNADDRCKTIND = A
                                                                                                         and ASGNIND = U
                                                                                                         (unassigned for address)
                                                                                                         echo from address query.
                                                                                                         This field may repeat the
                                                                                                         same number of times as
                                                                                                         the value in the
                                                                                                         ECCKTQ field.
TNAQ Address        O
Section
LQQ Query by        O
Address Section




                                                             140
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



         22.        SASS - Service Address Street Directional Suffix (continued)


Transaction Type   R/O/C                                     Business Rules
                   I R                                 I                                              R
LQR Address            C                                                                  Populated if returned.
Response Section
                                                                                          The Address Response
                                                                                          Section, of which this
                                                                                          field is a part, is used
                                                                                          when a good response is
                                                                                          returned from a search
                                                                                          (RESPONSE field = G).

                   DATA CHARACTERISTICS:               4 alphanumeric characters

                   EXAMPLE:       N   W

                    NOTE 1:     Where NW is the street directional suffix for the following address
                                example: 25W 450 1/2 SW Camino Ramon Lane NW, Suite 23A, Floor 12,
                                Wing 2.




                                                 141
                                                                                       Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                             LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



         23.        LD1 - Location Designator 1
                    Identifies additional specific information related to the address (e.g., room).

                      NOTE 1:           This field may be used for Inquiries and Responses.

                    VALID ENTRIES:
                            APT     =   Apartment
                            LOT     =   Lot
                            RM      =   Room
                            SLIP    =   Slip
                            SUIT    =   Suite
                            UNIT    =   Unit

                      NOTE 1:           Example: LD1 = APT, LV1 = 22A

                     USAGE:             This field is conditional.

Transaction Type     R/O/C                                           Business Rules
                     I R                                      I                                                  R
AVQ - Address        C         Required when the LV1 field is populated, otherwise prohibited.
Section
AVR - Exact               C                                                                           Required when the LV1
Match Section                                                                                         field is populated,
                                                                                                      otherwise prohibited.
AVR Supplemental          C                                                                           Required when the LV1
Information                                                                                           field is populated,
Section                                                                                               otherwise prohibited.

AVR Multiple and          C                                                                           Required when the LV1
Near Match                                                                                            field is populated,
Address Section                                                                                       otherwise prohibited.
FAQ Telephone        C         Required when the LV1 field is populated, otherwise prohibited.
Number Address
Circuit Indicator              Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO, SASF, SASD, SASN, SATH,
Section                        SASS, LD1, LV1, LD2, LV2, LD3, LV3, AHN, ROUTE, BOX,
                               CITY, STATE, ZIP, CALA repeat as a group for SCATEG = H
                               or D.

                               If SCATEG = H or D, then the Telephone Number Address
                               Circuit Indicator Section is required and may repeat up to 2
                               times.
                               Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO, SASF, SASD, SASN, SATH,
                               SASS, LD1, LV1, LD2, LV2, LD3, LV3, AHN, ROUTE, BOX,
                               CITY, STATE, ZIP, CALA, LSO are a group if SCATEG = P,
                               U or I.
                               If SCATEG = P, U, or I, then this section is required.




                                                             142
                                                                               Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                     LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



         23.        LD1 – Location Designator 1 (continued)


Transaction Type   R/O/C                                         Business Rules
                   I R                                    I                                               R
RLDQ Address       C       Required when the LV1 field is populated, otherwise prohibited.
Query Section
RLDR                   C                                                                     Required when the LV1
                                                                                             field is populated,
                                                                                             otherwise prohibited.

                                                                                             This field repeats the same
                                                                                             number of times as the
                                                                                             value in the ECCKTQ
                                                                                             field.
TNAQ Address       C       Required when the LV1 field is populated, otherwise prohibited.
Section
LQQ Query by       C       Required when the LV1 field is populated, otherwise prohibited.
Address Section
LQR Address            C                                                                     Required when the LV1
Response Section                                                                             field is populated,
                                                                                             otherwise prohibited.

                                                                                             Populated if returned.

                                                                                             The Address Response
                                                                                             Section, of which this field
                                                                                             is a part, is used when a
                                                                                             good response is returned
                                                                                             from a search (RESPONSE
                                                                                             field = G).

                   DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                   4 alpha characters

                   EXAMPLE:         A    P    T




                                                     143
                                                                             Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                   LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



 24.       LV1 - Location Value 1
          Identifies the value associated with the first location designator of the address.

               NOTE 1:       This field may be used for Inquiries and Responses.

               USAGE:        This field is conditional.

 Transaction      R/O/C                                          Business Rules
    Type
                 I       R                         I                                               R
AVQ - Address    C           Required when the LD1 field is populated,
Section                      otherwise prohibited.
AVR - Exact              C                                                          Required when the LD1 field is
Match Section                                                                       populated, otherwise prohibited.
AVR                      C                                                          Required when the LD1 field is
Supplemental                                                                        populated, otherwise prohibited.
Information
Section
AVR Multiple             C                                                          Required when the LD1 field is
and Near                                                                            populated, otherwise prohibited.
Match Address
Section
FAQ              C           Required when the LD1 field is populated,
Telephone                    otherwise prohibited.
Number
Address                      Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO, SASF, SASD, SASN,
Circuit                      SATH, SASS, LD1, LV1, LD2, LV2, LD3, LV3,
Indicator                    AHN, ROUTE, BOX, CITY, STATE, ZIP,
Section                      CALA repeat as a group for SCATEG = H or D.

                             If SCATEG = H or D, then the Telephone
                             Number Address Circuit Indicator Section is
                             required and may repeat up to 2 times.
                             Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO, SASF, SASD, SASN,
                             SATH, SASS, LD1, LV1, LD2, LV2, LD3, LV3,
                             AHN, ROUTE, BOX, CITY, STATE, ZIP,
                             CALA, LSO are a group if SCATEG = P, U or I.
                             If SCATEG = P, U, or I, then this section is
                             required.
RLDQ Address     C           Required when the LD1 field is populated,
Query Section                otherwise prohibited.




                                                  144
                                                                             Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                   LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



 24.           LV1 – Location Value 1 (continued)


 Transaction      R/O/C                                          Business Rules
    Type
                  I      R                            I                                          R
RLDR                     C                                                        Required when the LD1 field is
                                                                                  populated, otherwise prohibited.

                                                                                  This field repeats the same
                                                                                  number of times as the value in
                                                                                  the ECCKTQ field.
TNAQ Address      C          Required when the LD1 field is populated,
Section                      otherwise prohibited.
LQQ Query by      C          Required when the LD1 field is populated,
Address                      otherwise prohibited.
Section
LQR Address              C                                                        Required when the LD1 field is
Response                                                                          populated, otherwise prohibited.
Section
                                                                                  Populated if returned.

                                                                                  The Address Response Section,
                                                                                  of which this field is a part, is
                                                                                  used when a good response is
                                                                                  returned from a search
                                                                                  (RESPONSE field = G).

               NOTE 1:       Example: LD1 = APT, LV1 = 22A

          DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           10 alphanumeric characters

          EXAMPLE:             2    2    A




                                                145
                                                                                       Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                             LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



      25.          LD2 - Location Designator 2
                   Identifies additional specific information related to the address (e.g., floor).

                     NOTE 1:          This field may be used for Inquiries and Responses.

                   VALID ENTRIES:
                           FLR     = Floor

                     NOTE 1:          Example: LD2 = FLR, LV2 = 12

                    USAGE:            This field is conditional.

Transaction    R/O/C                                                  Business Rules
   Type
               I      R                                   I                                                        R
AVQ -          C           Required when the LV2 field is populated, otherwise prohibited.
Address
Section
AVR - Exact           C                                                                               Required when the LV2
Match                                                                                                 field is populated, otherwise
Section                                                                                               prohibited.
AVR                   C                                                                               Required when the LV2
Supplemental                                                                                          field is populated, otherwise
Information                                                                                           prohibited.
Section
AVR Multiple          C                                                                               Required when the LV2
and Near                                                                                              field is populated, otherwise
Match                                                                                                 prohibited.
Address
Section
FAQ            C           Required when the LV2 field is populated, otherwise prohibited.
Telephone
Number                     Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO, SASF, SASD, SASN, SATH, SASS,
Address                    LD1, LV1, LD2, LV2, LD3, LV3, AHN, ROUTE, BOX, CITY,
Circuit                    STATE, ZIP, CALA repeat as a group for SCATEG = H or D.
Indicator
Section                    If SCATEG = H or D, then the Telephone Number Address
                           Circuit Indicator Section is required and may repeat up to 2
                           times.
                           Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO, SASF, SASD, SASN, SATH, SASS,
                           LD1, LV1, LD2, LV2, LD3, LV3, AHN, ROUTE, BOX, CITY,
                           STATE, ZIP, CALA, LSO are a group if SCATEG = P, U or I.
                           If SCATEG = P, U, or I, then this section is required.




                                                           146
                                                                                Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                      LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120




       25.           LD2 – Location Designator 2 (continued)


 Transaction    R/O/C                                           Business Rules
    Type
                I    R                                  I                                               R
RLDQ            C        Required when the LV2 field is populated, otherwise prohibited.
Address
Query Section
RLDR                 C                                                                     Required when the LV2
                                                                                           field is populated, otherwise
                                                                                           prohibited.

                                                                                           This field repeats the same
                                                                                           number of times as the
                                                                                           value in the ECCKTQ field.
TNAQ            C        Required when the LV2 field is populated, otherwise prohibited.
Address
Section
LQQ Query       C        Required when the LV2 field is populated, otherwise prohibited.
by Address
Section
LQR Address          C                                                                     Required when the LV2
Response                                                                                   field is populated, otherwise
Section                                                                                    prohibited.

                                                                                           Populated if returned.

                                                                                           The Address Response
                                                                                           Section, of which this field
                                                                                           is a part, is used when a
                                                                                           good response is returned
                                                                                           from a search (RESPONSE
                                                                                           field = G).

                    DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                    4 alphanumeric characters

                    EXAMPLE:         F    L    R




                                                      147
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120


26.   LV2 - Location Value 2
      Identifies the value associated with the second location designator of the address.

        NOTE 1:         This field may be used for Inquiries and Responses.

       USAGE:           This field is conditional.

         Transaction          R/O/C                             Business Rules
            Type
                             I       R                   I                             R
       AVQ - Address         C             Required when the LD2
       Section                             field is populated,
                                           otherwise prohibited.
       AVR - Exact                   C                                    Required when the LD2
       Match Section                                                      field is populated,
                                                                          otherwise prohibited.
       AVR                           C                                    Required when the LD2
       Supplemental                                                       field is populated,
       Information                                                        otherwise prohibited.
       Section
       AVR Multiple                  C                                    Required when the LD2
       and Near Match                                                     field is populated,
       Address Section                                                    otherwise prohibited.
       FAQ Telephone         C             Required when the LD2
       Number                              field is populated,
       Address Circuit                     otherwise prohibited.
       Indicator
       Section                             Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO,
                                           SASF, SASD, SASN,
                                           SATH, SASS, LD1, LV1,
                                           LD2, LV2, LD3, LV3,
                                           AHN, ROUTE, BOX,
                                           CITY, STATE, ZIP,
                                           CALA repeat as a group
                                           for SCATEG = H or D.

                                           If SCATEG = H or D, then
                                           the Telephone Number
                                           Address Circuit Indicator
                                           Section is required and
                                           may repeat up to 2 times.
                                           Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO,
                                           SASF, SASD, SASN,
                                           SATH, SASS, LD1, LV1,
                                           LD2, LV2, LD3, LV3,
                                           AHN, ROUTE, BOX,
                                           CITY, STATE, ZIP,
                                           CALA, LSO are a group if
                                           SCATEG = P, U or I.
                                           If SCATEG = P, U, or I,
                                           then this section is
                                           required.




                                             148
                                                                  Effective October 25, 2010
                                                        LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



26.    LV2 – Location Value 2 (continued)


        Transaction         R/O/C                         Business Rules
           Type
                            I       R                 I                         R
      RLDQ Address          C           Required when the LD2
      Query Section                     field is populated,
                                        otherwise prohibited.

      RLDR                          C                              Required when the LD2
                                                                   field is populated,
                                                                   otherwise prohibited.

                                                                   This field repeats the same
                                                                   number of times as the
                                                                   value in the ECCKTQ
                                                                   field.
      TNAQ Address          C           Required when the LD2
      Section                           field is populated,
                                        otherwise prohibited.
      LQQ Query by          C           Required when the LD2
      Address Section                   field is populated,
                                        otherwise prohibited.
      LQR Address                   C                              Required when the LD2
      Response                                                     field is populated,
      Section                                                      otherwise prohibited.

                                                                   Populated if returned.

                                                                   The Address Response
                                                                   Section, of which this field
                                                                   is a part, is used when a
                                                                   good response is returned
                                                                   from a search (RESPONSE
                                                                   field = G).

       NOTE 1:        Example: LD2 = FLR, LV2 = 12

      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                    10 alphanumeric characters

      EXAMPLE:          1       2




                                         149
                                                                              Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                    LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



 27.       LD3 - Location Designator 3
           Identifies additional specific information related to the address (e.g., building).

               NOTE 1:         This field may be used for Inquiries and Responses.


           VALID ENTRIES:
                   BLDG = Building
                   PIER = Pier
                   WING = Wing

               NOTE 1:         Example: LD3 = BLDG, LV3 = Research

            USAGE:             This field is conditional.

 Transaction        R/O/C                                            Business Rules
    Type
                   I       R                            I                                          R
AVQ - Address      C              Required when the LV3 field is populated,
Section                           otherwise prohibited.
AVR - Exact                C                                                      Required when the LV3 field is
Match Section                                                                     populated, otherwise prohibited.
AVR                        C                                                      Required when the LV3 field is
Supplemental                                                                      populated, otherwise prohibited.
Information
Section
AVR Multiple               C                                                      Required when the LV3 field is
and Near Match                                                                    populated, otherwise prohibited.
Address Section
FAQ Telephone      C              Required when the LV3 field is populated,
Number                            otherwise prohibited.
Address Circuit
Indicator                         Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO, SASF, SASD,
Section                           SASN, SATH, SASS, LD1, LV1, LD2,
                                  LV2, LD3, LV3, AHN, ROUTE, BOX,
                                  CITY, STATE, ZIP, CALA repeat as a
                                  group for SCATEG = H or D.

                                  If SCATEG = H or D, then the Telephone
                                  Number Address Circuit Indicator Section
                                  is required and may repeat up to 2 times.
                                  Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO, SASF, SASD,
                                  SASN, SATH, SASS, LD1, LV1, LD2,
                                  LV2, LD3, LV3, AHN, ROUTE, BOX,
                                  CITY, STATE, ZIP, CALA, LSO are a
                                  group if SCATEG = P, U or I.
                                  If SCATEG = P, U, or I, then this section
                                  is required.




                                                    150
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



 27.            LD3 – Location Designator 3 (continued)


  Transaction             R/O/C                                         Business Rules
     Type
                    I            R                         I                                  R
RLDQ Address        C                        Required when the LV3
Query Section                                field is populated,
                                             otherwise prohibited.

RLDR                             C                                         Required when the LV3 field is
                                                                           populated, otherwise prohibited.

                                                                           This field repeats the same number of
                                                                           times as the value in the ECCKTQ
                                                                           field.
TNAQ Address        C                        Required when the LV3
Section                                      field is populated,
                                             otherwise prohibited.
LQQ Query by        C                        Required when the LV3
Address Section                              field is populated,
                                             otherwise prohibited.
LQR Address                      C                                         Required when the LV3 field is
Response                                                                   populated, otherwise prohibited.
Section
                                                                           Populated if returned.

                                                                           The Address Response Section, of
                                                                           which this field is a part, is used when
                                                                           a good response is returned from a
                                                                           search (RESPONSE field = G).

           DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                       4 alphanumeric characters

           EXAMPLE:          B       L   D   G




                                                 151
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



28.   LV3 - Location Value 3
      Identifies the value associated with the third location designator of the address.

        NOTE 1:          This field may be used for Inquiries and Responses.

       USAGE:           This field is conditional.

         Transaction           R/O/C                             Business Rules
            Type
                             I       R                   I                                 R
       AVQ - Address         C             Required when the LD3
       Section                             field is populated,
                                           otherwise prohibited.
       AVR - Exact                   C                                     Required when the LD3
       Match Section                                                       field is populated,
                                                                           otherwise prohibited.
       AVR                           C                                     Required when the LD3
       Supplemental                                                        field is populated,
       Information                                                         otherwise prohibited.
       Section
       AVR Multiple                  C                                     Required when the LD3
       and Near Match                                                      field is populated,
       Address Section                                                     otherwise prohibited.
       FAQ Telephone         C             Required when the LD3
       Number                              field is populated,
       Address Circuit                     otherwise prohibited.
       Indicator
       Section                             Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO,
                                           SASF, SASD, SASN,
                                           SATH, SASS, LD1, LV1,
                                           LD2, LV2, LD3, LV3,
                                           AHN, ROUTE, BOX,
                                           CITY, STATE, ZIP,
                                           CALA repeat as a group
                                           for SCATEG = H or D.

                                           If SCATEG = H or D, then
                                           the Telephone Number
                                           Address Circuit Indicator
                                           Section is required and
                                           may repeat up to 2 times.
                                           Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO,
                                           SASF, SASD, SASN,
                                           SATH, SASS, LD1, LV1,
                                           LD2, LV2, LD3, LV3,
                                           AHN, ROUTE, BOX,
                                           CITY, STATE, ZIP,
                                           CALA, LSO are a group if
                                           SCATEG = P, U or I.
                                           If SCATEG = P, U, or I,
                                           then this section is
                                           required.



                                             152
                                                                     Effective October 25, 2010
                                                           LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120




28.    LV3 – Location Value 3 (continued)


        Transaction         R/O/C                            Business Rules
           Type
                            I       R                 I                            R
      RLDQ Address          C           Required when the LD3
      Query Section                     field is populated,
                                        otherwise prohibited.

      RLDR                          C                                 Required when the LD3
                                                                      field is populated,
                                                                      otherwise prohibited.

                                                                      This field repeats the same
                                                                      number of times as the
                                                                      value in the ECCKTQ
                                                                      field.
      TNAQ Address          C           Required when the LD3
      Section                           field is populated,
                                        otherwise prohibited.
      LQQ Query by          C           Required when the LD3
      Address Section                   field is populated,
                                        otherwise prohibited.
      LQR Address                   C                                 Required when the LD3
      Response                                                        field is populated,
      Section                                                         otherwise prohibited.

                                                                      Populated if returned.

                                                                      The Address Response
                                                                      Section, of which this field
                                                                      is a part, is used when a
                                                                      good response is returned
                                                                      from a search (RESPONSE
                                                                      field = G).

       NOTE 1:        Example: LD3 = BLDG, LV3 = Research

      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                       10 alphanumeric characters

      EXAMPLE:          R       E   S   E    A    R    C    H




                                            153
                                                                                      Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                            LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120


          28a.       AHN – Assigned House Number - Qwest-Specific Field

                     Identifies the unnumbered addresses as a house number identifier.
                           NOTE 1:      This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.
                         VALID ENTRIES:
                           Valid for Transaction Type AVQ:
                           Central = 1-9999
                           Eastern = 1-9999
                           Western = 1-9999
                           X (used when the AHN value is not known)
                     USAGE:       This field is conditional.
Transaction      R/O/                                                Business Rules
   Type            C
                 I R                                       I                                                   R
AVQ              C        Populated only if the SASN field begins with a comma (,). This field
Section                   should be populated in conjunction with the LNAME field.
                          If the AHN is unknown, the AHN field can be populated with "X" to
                          search for the AHN value. The LNAME field may be optionally
                          populated when the AHN = X.
                          When populating this field, the ROUTE and BOX fields should be
                          populated, if known.
AVR Exact            C                                                                           Value received on an exact
Match                                                                                            match for an unnumbered
Section                                                                                          address.
AVR                  O
Multiple
and Near
Match
Section
FAQ              C        Can only be populated when the SASN field begins with a comma
Telephone                 (,).
Number
Address                   Prohibited when the SANO field is populated.
Circuit
Indicator                 Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO, SASF, SASD, SASN, SATH, SASS,
Section                   LD1, LV1, LD2, LV2, LD3, LV3, AHN, ROUTE, BOX, CITY,
                          STATE, ZIP, CALA repeat as a group for SCATEG = H or D.

                          If SCATEG = H or D, then the Telephone Number Address Circuit
                          Indicator Section
                          is required and may repeat up to 2 times.
                          Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO, SASF, SASD, SASN, SATH, SASS,
                          LD1, LV1, LD2, LV2, LD3, LV3, AHN, ROUTE, BOX, CITY,
                          STATE, ZIP, CALA, LSO are a group if SCATEG = P, U or I.
                          If SCATEG = P, U, or I, then this section is required.
LQR –                C                                                                           Populated if returned.
Loop
Qualificatio
n Address
Response




                                                            154
                                                                                    Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                          LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



        28a.           AHN – Assigned House Number - Qwest-Specific Field (continued)


Transaction    R/O/                                               Business Rules
   Type          C
               I R                                 I                                                       R
RLDQ           C        Required when the TNADDRCKTIND field = A and the SANO
                        field is not populated.

                        This field can only be populated if the SASN field begins with an
                        “@” sign.
TNAQ           C        Required when the SANO field is blank, otherwise not applicable.
Address
Section
LQQ Query      C
                        Required if SANO is not populated and TNADDRCKTIND = A.
by Address              Can only be populated if SASN begins with a comma ', '.
Section
                        The SANO Field
                        cannot be populated.
LQR                C                                                                        Populated if returned.
Address
Response                                                                                    The Address Response
Section                                                                                     Section, of which this field is a
                                                                                            part, is used when a good
                                                                                            response is returned from a
                                                                                            search (RESPONSE field =
                                                                                            G).

                   DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                        8 alphanumeric characters

                       EXAMPLE: 1              3   5




                                                          155
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



 28b.      ROUTE – Rural Route - Qwest-Specific Field

           Identifies the Rural Route number.

                 NOTE 1:     This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

           USAGE:            This field is optional.

 Transaction    R/O/                                         Business Rules
    Type          C
                I R                                    I                                               R
AVQ Section     O       Prohibited when the SANO field is populated, otherwise optional.
AVR Exact           O
Match Section
AVR Multiple        O
and Near
Match Section
FAQ             O       Prohibited when the SCATEG field = I, or U, and/or the SANO
Telephone               field is populated, otherwise optional.
Number
Address                 Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO, SASF, SASD, SASN, SATH, SASS,
Circuit                 LD1, LV1, LD2, LV2, LD3, LV3, AHN, ROUTE, BOX, CITY,
Indicator               STATE, ZIP, CALA repeat as a group for SCATEG = H or D.
Section
                        If SCATEG = H or D, then the Telephone Number Address Circuit
                        Indicator Section is required and may repeat up to 2 times.
                        Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO, SASF, SASD, SASN, SATH, SASS,
                        LD1, LV1, LD2, LV2, LD3, LV3, AHN, ROUTE, BOX, CITY,
                        STATE, ZIP, CALA, LSO are a group if SCATEG = P, U or I.
                        If SCATEG = P, U, or I, then this section is required.
RLDQ            O
TNAQ            O
Address
Section
LQQ Query       O
by Address
Section
LQR Address         C                                                                      Populated if returned.
Response
Section                                                                                    The Address
                                                                                           Response Section, of
                                                                                           which this field is a
                                                                                           part, is used when a
                                                                                           good response is
                                                                                           returned from a
                                                                                           search (RESPONSE
                                                                                           field = G).

           DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                       3 alphanumeric characters

               EXAMPLE: F          3     2




                                                 156
                                                                             Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                   LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120


 28c.        BOX – Box Number - Qwest-Specific Field
             Identifies the Postal box number.
                   NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.
             USAGE:              This field is conditional.
Transaction         R/O/C                                           Business Rules
   Type
                   I        R                            I                                             R
AVQ Section        C              Optional when the ROUTE field is populated,
                                  otherwise prohibited.
AVR Exact                   O
Match
Section
AVR                         O
Multiple and
Near Match
Section
FAQ                O              Prohibited when the SCATEG field = I, or U, and/or
Telephone                         the SANO field is populated, otherwise optional.
Number
Address                           Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO, SASF, SASD, SASN,
Circuit                           SATH, SASS, LD1, LV1, LD2, LV2, LD3, LV3,
Indicator                         AHN, ROUTE, BOX, CITY, STATE, ZIP, CALA
Section                           repeat as a group for SCATEG = H or D.

                                  If SCATEG = H or D, then the Telephone Number
                                  Address Circuit Indicator Section is required and may
                                  repeat up to 2 times.
                                  Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO, SASF, SASD, SASN,
                                  SATH, SASS, LD1, LV1, LD2, LV2, LD3, LV3,
                                  AHN, ROUTE, BOX, CITY, STATE, ZIP, CALA,
                                  LSO are a group if SCATEG = P, U or I.
                                  If SCATEG = P, U, or I, then this section is required.
RLDQ               O
TNAQ               O
Address
Section
LQQ Query          O
by Address
Section
LQR                         C                                                              Populated if returned.
Address
Response                                                                                   The Address Response
Section                                                                                    Section, of which this
                                                                                           field is a part, is used
                                                                                           when a good response is
                                                                                           returned from a search
                                                                                           (RESPONSE field = G).

              DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                       12 alphanumeric characters

               EXAMPLE: 3             2    J    1




                                                    157
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



28d.   LNAME – Listed Name - Qwest-Specific Field

       Identifies the name that will appear on the Directory Listings.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

       USAGE:             This field is conditional.

          Transaction          R/O/C                              Business Rules
             Type
                              I       R                    I                           R
        AVQ Section           C               When the AHN field = X,
                                              the format for this field
                                              must be “Last Name”, or
                                              “Last Name, First Name”.
        AVR Exact                     C                                    Value received on an exact
        Match Section –                                                    match.
        WTN Section
                                                                           Required when the section
                                                                           is present.

                                                                           WTN, WTNSTAT, and
                                                                           LNAME may repeat as a
                                                                           group.
        AVR Remark                    C                                    This field may repeat the
        Section                                                            same number of times as
                                                                           the value of the NMNUM
                                                                           field.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           100 alphanumeric characters

        EXAMPLE: J             O    H     N       P       J   O N     E   S




                                               158
                                                                       Effective October 25, 2010
                                                             LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



29.   AA1 – Address Additional Information – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies additional location information about the address.




                                             159
                                                                              Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                    LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



29a.   TPRDI – Third Party, Resale or DSL - Qwest-Specific Field

       Indicates the third party voice, resale, or broadband.

             NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

        VALID ENTRIES:

           Third Party Voice
           Resale
           Broadband

       USAGE:             This field is conditional.

              Transaction Type                    R/O/C                              Business Rules
                                              I           R              I                        R
        LQR – Circuit Information                         C                          Populated if returned.
        and Counters Section
                                                                                     May repeat as a group.
        RLDR – Raw Loop Data                              C                          Populated if returned.
        Section

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                            20 alphanumeric characters

        EXAMPLE:

             T    H   I    R    D         P   A     R     T     Y            V   O     I    C   E




                                              160
                                                                                      Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                            LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



         30.        CITY – City
                    Identifies the city, village or township, etc.

                          NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

                     USAGE:            This field is conditional.

 Transaction    R/O/                                                 Business Rules
    Type          C
                I R                                 I                                                R
AVQ - Address   C         Required when the SEARCHTYP field = A
Validation                Either the full or abbreviated city name may be
                          used on the address validation query.
AVR - Exact          C                                                         Value received on exact match.
Match Section
AVR -                O                                                         If an abbreviated form of the city name field
Multiple and                                                                   is returned, then that same abbreviation
Near Match                                                                     should be input onto the LSR.
Address
Section
FAQ –           C         Required if the TNADDRCKTIND field = A.
Telephone                 The address must have already been validated
Number                    and must be an exact match.
Address
Circuit                   Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO, SASF, SASD,
Indicator                 SASN, SATH, SASS, LD1, LV1, LD2, LV2,
Section                   LD3, LV3, AHN, ROUTE, BOX, CITY, STATE,
                          ZIP, CALA repeat as a group for SCATEG = H
                          or D.

                          If SCATEG = H or D, then the Telephone
                          Number Address Circuit Indicator Section is
                          required and may repeat up to 2 times.
                          Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO, SASF, SASD,
                          SASN, SATH, SASS, LD1, LV1, LD2, LV2,
                          LD3, LV3, AHN, ROUTE, BOX, CITY, STATE,
                          ZIP, CALA, LSO are a group if SCATEG = P, U
                          or I.
                          If SCATEG = P, U, or I, then this section is
                          required.
RLDQ            C         Required if the TNADDRCKTIND field = A.
RLDR                 O                                                         This field may repeat the same number of
                                                                               times as the value in the ECCKTQ field.
TNAQ            R
Address
Section
LQQ Query by    C         Required when the TNADDRCKTIND field = A.
Address
Section




                                                             161
                                                                     Effective October 25, 2010
                                                           LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



        30.       CITY – City (continued)

 Transaction   R/O/                                 Business Rules
    Type        C
               I R                    I                                                R
LQR Address       C                                           Populated if returned.
Response
Section                                                       The Address Response Section, of which this
                                                              field is a part, is used when a good response
                                                              is returned from a search (RESPONSE field
                                                              = G).

                 DATA CHARACTERISTICS:            32 alphanumeric characters

                EXAMPLE:
                 C O N C O R D




                                            162
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



31.   STATE - State/Province
      Identifies the abbreviation for the state or province.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

       USAGE:            This field is conditional.

         Transaction           R/O/C             Valid                           Business Rules
            Type                                Entries
                              I      R         I       R                         I                         R
       AVQ - Address          C                                Required if the SEARCHTYP field =
       Validation                                              A, otherwise optional.
       AVR - Exact                   C                                                                 Value
       Match Section                                                                                   received
                                                                                                       on exact
                                                                                                       match.
       AVR -Multiple                 O
       and Near Match
       Address Section
       FAQ –                  C                                Required if the TNADDRCKTIND
       Telephone                                               field = A. The address must have
       Number                                                  already been validated and must be an
       Address Circuit                                         exact match.
       Indicator
       Section                                                 Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO, SASF,
                                                               SASD, SASN, SATH, SASS, LD1,
                                                               LV1, LD2, LV2, LD3, LV3, AHN,
                                                               ROUTE, BOX, CITY, STATE, ZIP,
                                                               CALA repeat as a group for SCATEG
                                                               = H or D.

                                                               If SCATEG = H or D, then the
                                                               Telephone Number Address Circuit
                                                               Indicator Section is required and may
                                                               repeat up to 2 times.
                                                               Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO, SASF,
                                                               SASD, SASN, SATH, SASS, LD1,
                                                               LV1, LD2, LV2, LD3, LV3, AHN,
                                                               ROUTE, BOX, CITY, STATE, ZIP,
                                                               CALA, LSO are a group if SCATEG
                                                               = P, U or I.
                                                               If SCATEG = P, U, or I, then this
                                                               section is required.
       RLDQ                   C                                Required if the TNADDRCKTIND
                                                               field = A.




                                              163
                                                                   Effective October 25, 2010
                                                         LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



31.    STATE - State/Province (continued)


       Transaction          R/O/C           Valid Entries                     Business Rules
          Type
      RLDR                          O                                               This field may repeat
                                                                                    the same number of
                                                                                    times as the value in
                                                                                    the ECCKTQ field.
      SAQ Address           C                                       Required when
      Section                                                       the
                                                                    INFOTYPE
                                                                    field = S.
      SAR USOC                      C               14 valid                        Required if the
      Section                                       states in the                   RESPONSE field = G
                                                    Qwest                           and the INFOTYPE
                                                    region.                         field = S.
      TNAQ Address          R
      Section
      LQQ Query by          C           14 valid                    Required when
      Address Section                   states in                   the
                                        the Qwest                   TNADDRCK
                                        region                      TIND field =
                                                                    A
      LQR Address                   C                                               Populated if returned.
      Response
      Section                                                                       The Address Response
                                                                                    Section, of which this
                                                                                    field is a part, is used
                                                                                    when a good response
                                                                                    is returned from a
                                                                                    search (RESPONSE
                                                                                    field = G).

      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:
      For Transaction Type: AVQ, AVR, and TNAQ: 2 alpha characters
      For Transaction Type: FAQ, RLDQ, RLDR, SAQ, SAR, LQQ and LQR: 2 alphanumeric
      characters

      EXAMPLE:          C       O




                                         164
                                                                                       Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                             LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120


          32.           ZIP - ZIP/Postal Code
                        Identifies the ZIP code, ZIP code + extension or postal code.
                              NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.
                         USAGE:            This field is conditional.
Transaction     R/O/                                                 Business Rules
   Type           C
                I R                              I                                                    R
AVQ -           C         Required if the SEARCHTYP field = A and
Address                   CALA field is not populated.
Validation
                          Optional if SEARCHTYP field = T.
AVR -               C                                                         Value received on exact match.
Exact
Match
Section
AVR -               O
Multiple
and Near
Match
Address
Section
FAQ –           C         Required when the TNADDRCKTIND field = A,
Telephone                 T or C and the CALA field is not populated.
Number                    Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO, SASF, SASD,
Address                   SASN, SATH, SASS, LD1, LV1, LD2, LV2,
Circuit                   LD3, LV3, AHN, ROUTE, BOX, CITY,
Indicator                 STATE, ZIP, CALA repeat as a group for
Section                   SCATEG = H or D.
                          If SCATEG = H or D, then the Telephone
                          Number Address Circuit Indicator Section is
                          required and may repeat up to 2 times.
                          Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO, SASF, SASD,
                          SASN, SATH, SASS, LD1, LV1, LD2, LV2,
                          LD3, LV3, AHN, ROUTE, BOX, CITY,
                          STATE, ZIP, CALA, LSO are a group if
                          SCATEG = P, U or I.
                          If SCATEG = P, U, or I, then this section is
                          required.
RLDQ            C         Required if the TNADDRCKTIND field = A.
                          Required when the CALA field is not populated.
RLDR                O                                                         This field may repeat the same number of times as
                                                                              the value in the ECCKTQ field.
                                                                              If this field is present in the address query, echo
                                                                              from the address query; otherwise populate as null.
TNAQ            C         Required if the CALA field is not populated.
Address
Section




                                                             165
                                                                                       Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                             LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



        32.            ZIP - ZIP/Postal Code (continued)


Transaction   R/O/                                                    Business Rules
   Type         C
              I R                            I                                                        R
LQQ Query     C         Required when the TNADDRCKTIND field = A.
by Address
Section
LQQ Query     C         Required if the CALA field is not provided.
by WTN
Section                 If the request is for Qwest Broadband or Loop
                        Level Data and the TNADDRCKTIND field =T
                        then this field does not need to be populated.
LQR               C                                                          Populated if returned.
Address
Response                                                                     The Address Response Section, of which this field
Section                                                                      is a part, is used when a good response is returned
                                                                             from a search (RESPONSE field = G).

                      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:
                      For the Transaction type of AVQ and AVR: 5 numeric characters
                      For the Transaction type of FAQ, RLDQ, TNAQ, LQQ and LQR: 5 numeric characters
                      For the Transaction type of RLDR: 10 alphanumeric characters

                      EXAMPLES:             9    4    5    8     3

                                            8    0    2    0     2      -   1    2     3     4




                                                           166
                                                                            Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                  LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



 32a.     CALA – Customer Address Location Area – Qwest-Specific Field
          Identifies the code for an area that an address is located in when a zip code is unavailable.


                NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

            VALID ENTRIES:
                     BLVU
                     CHY
                     CO
                     CPR
                     DNV
                     EAST
                     EUGN
                     IA
                     ID
                     IDO
                     MAL
                     MN
                     MT
                     MTA
                     NCO
                     ND
                     NE
                     NMX
                     OLYM
                     OREA
                     PNX
                     PORT
                     SCO
                     SD
                     SEAT
                     SPOK
                     TSN
                     UT
                     UTA
                     VANC
                     WI
                     WO
                     WY
                     WYO

            USAGE:          This field is conditional.

 Transaction Type     R/O/C                                         Business Rules
                      I R                                   I                                             R
AVQ - Address         C         Required if the SEARCHTYP field = A and ZIP field
Validation                      is not populated or if the ZIP crosses multiple
                                CALAs.

                                Optional if SEARCHTYP field = T.



                                                 167
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



  32a.        CALA – Customer Address Location Area – Qwest-Specific Field
              (continued)


Transaction Type    R/O/C                                       Business Rules
                    I R                                 I                                          R
AVR - Exact             C                                                              Value received on exact
Match Section                                                                          match.
AVR -Multiple           O
and Near Match
Address Section
AVR – Multiple          C                                                              This field applies only if
CALA Match                                                                             CALA was not provided
Address Section                                                                        on the AVQ and a Multiple
                                                                                       CALA Match is found
                                                                                       (ADDRES = E).
FAQ – Telephone     C       Required when the TNADDRCKTIND field = A, T or
Number Address              C and the ZIP field is not populated, or if the ZIP
Circuit Indicator           crosses multiple CALAs.
Section
                            When the SCATEG field = M and the
                            TNADDRCKTIND field = T, this field does not need
                            to be populated.

                            Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO, SASF, SASD, SASN,
                            SATH, SASS, LD1, LV1, LD2, LV2, LD3, LV3,
                            AHN, ROUTE, BOX, CITY, STATE, ZIP, CALA
                            repeat as a group for SCATEG = H or D.

                            If SCATEG = H or D, then the Telephone Number
                            Address Circuit Indicator Section is required and may
                            repeat up to 2 times.
                            Fields AFT, SAPR, SANO, SASF, SASD, SASN,
                            SATH, SASS, LD1, LV1, LD2, LV2, LD3, LV3,
                            AHN, ROUTE, BOX, CITY, STATE, ZIP, CALA,
                            LSO are a group if SCATEG = P, U or I.
                            If SCATEG = P, U, or I, then this section is required.
RLDQ                C       Required if the ZIP field is not populated.

                            Required if the TNADDRCKTIND field = A.
TNAQ Address        C       Required if the ZIP field is not populated or if the ZIP
Section                     crosses multiple CALAs.




                                               168
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



32a.       CALA – Customer Address Location Area – Qwest-Specific Field
           (continued)

Transaction Type    R/O/                                       Business Rules
                      C
                    I R                               I                                           R
LQQ Query by        C       Required when the ZIP field is not populated or if the
Address Section             ZIP crosses multiple CALAs.


LQQ Query by        C       Required when the ZIP field is not populated or if the
WTN Section                 ZIP crosses multiple CALAs.

                            If the request is for Qwest Broadband or Loop Level
                            Data and the TNADDRCKTIND field = T, then this
                            field does not need to be populated.
LQR Address             C                                                            Populated if returned.
Response Section
                                                                                     The Address Response
                                                                                     Section, of which this field
                                                                                     is a part, is used when a
                                                                                     good response is returned
                                                                                     from a search (RESPONSE
                                                                                     field = G).

           DATA CHARACTERISTICS:
           For the Transaction Type of RLDQ: 4 alphanumeric characters
           For the Transaction Type of AVQ, AVR, FAQ, TNAQ and LQQ: 4 alpha characters

            EXAMPLE:
            O R E A




                                               169
                                                                       Effective October 25, 2010
                                                             LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



32b.   ADDRES – Address Type Indicator – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the type of match returned after the Address Validation Query.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:           This field is required.

         Transaction Type
                                  R/O/                Valid Entries                  Business
                                   C                                                  Rules
                                  I R     I                   R                    I       R
        AVR - Address                R         A = Exact Match (applies to both
        Match Section                         Address & TN search)
                                              B = No Match or Error
                                              C = Near Match (applies only when
                                              SEARCHTYP = A on the query)
                                              D = Multiple Match (applies only
                                              when SEARCTYP = T on the
                                              query)
                                              E = Multiple CALA

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                        1 alpha character

       EXAMPLE:               A




                                              170
                                                                                  Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                        LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



32c.   SAGMESS – Street Address Guide Message – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies when an address is SAG only.

              NOTE 1:          This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:                This field is conditional.

            Transaction
               Type              R/O/C       Valid                              Business Rules
                                            Entries
                                 I    R     I    R         I                            R
        AVR - Address                 C                          Populated when the address is SAG only.
        Match Section
                                                                 SAG Only alerts you that facilities may not exist at
                                                                 the address and additional data is needed before
                                                                 submitting your service request. The SAGMESS
                                                                 field will indicate that this address is SAG only
                                                                 and additional information will be needed when
                                                                 submitting the LSR for this address. Please supply
                                                                 additional information, such as nearby working
                                                                 Qwest TN, when submitting your request.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                                   255 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:

        1    8      F     I     F T H           S T R E E T                    D E N V E R                C O




                                                   171
                                                                               Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                     LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



32d.   LOCA – Location A - Qwest-Specific Field

       Identifies the originating CLLI Code.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

        VALID ENTRIES:
                   For the FAQ CFA Section:
                   Valid CLLI Code applying to the service location

       USAGE:            This field is conditional.

        Transaction Type      R/O/C                                   Business Rules
                              I R                            I                              R
        CFAR                      R
        Administrative
        Section
        CFAQ Cable            R             If only LOCA and LOCZ are
        Facility Query                      populated, the CLEC wants all
        Section                             the Cable Group records
                                            matching the given ACNA,
                                            LOCA and LOCZ.
        CFAR Cable Pair             R                                           This field is populated
        Groups Section                                                          when the RESPONSE
                                                                                field = G and the
                                                                                SEARCHTYP field = G.
        CFAR Cable Pair             R                                           This field is populated
        Units Section                                                           when the RESPONSE
                                                                                field = G and the
                                                                                SEARCHTYP field = U.
        FAQ CFA Section       C             Required when the FACDES
                                            field is populated.

                                            Optional if the SCATEG field
                                            = H or D.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                            11 alphanumeric characters

        EXAMPLE: D              N       V     R    C     O       D    N    D   S    0




                                                  172
                                                                              Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                    LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



32e.   LOCZ – Location Z - Qwest-Specific Field

       Identifies the terminating CLLI Code.

            NOTE 1:      This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

        VALID ENTRIES:
                  For the FAQ CFA Section:
                  Valid CLLI Code applying to the service location.

       USAGE:            This field is conditional.

        Transaction Type      R/O/C                                  Business Rules
                              I R                           I                              R
        CFAR                      R
        Administrative
        Section
        CFAQ Cable            R            If only LOCA and LOCZ are
        Facility Query                     populated, the CLEC wants all
        Section                            the Cable Group records
                                           matching the given ACNA,
                                           LOCA and LOCZ.
        CFAR Cable Pair            R                                           This field is populated
        Groups Section                                                         when the RESPONSE
                                                                               field = G and the
                                                                               SEARCHTYP field = G.
        CFAR Cable Pair            R                                           This field is populated
        Units Section                                                          when the RESPONSE
                                                                               field = G and the
                                                                               SEARCHTYP field = U.
        FAQ CFA Section       C            Required when the FACDES
                                           field is populated.

                                           Optional if the SCATEG field
                                           = H or D.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           11 alphanumeric characters

        EXAMPLE: D             N       V     R    C     O       D    N    D   S    0




                                                 173
                                                                             Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                   LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



32f.   CABNM – Cable Name - Qwest-Specific Field

       Identifies a unique designation assigned to a group of cable pair/units between two terminal
       points.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

       USAGE:             This field is conditional.

          Transaction
             Type            R/O/C        Valid                          Business Rules
                                         Entries
                             I       R   I    R                  I                        R
        CFAQ Cable           C                         Required if the
        Facility Query                                 SEARCHTYP
        Section                                        field = U.
        CFAR Cable                   C                                       This field is populated when
        Pair Groups                                                          the RESPONSE field = G
        Section                                                              and the SEARCHTYP field
                                                                             = G.
        CFAR Cable                   R                                       This field is populated when
        Pair Units                                                           the RESPONSE field = G
        Section                                                              and the SEARCHTYP field
                                                                             = U.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                             10 alphanumeric characters

        EXAMPLE: D               E       N   0     1      A    6




                                                 174
                                                                                Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                      LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



32g.   FIRST UNIT – First Unit - Qwest-Specific Field

       Identifies the unit by number within the inter-office or tie cable complement.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

       USAGE:             This field is conditional.

          Transaction
             Type            R/O/C            Valid                          Business Rules
                                             Entries
                             I       R       I    R                  I                        R
        CFAQ Cable           C                             Required if the
        Facility Query                                     SEARCHTYP
        Section                                            field = U.
        CFAR Cable                   C                                           This field is populated when
        Pair Groups                                                              the RESPONSE field = G
        Section                                                                  and the SEARCHTYP field
                                                                                 = G.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                                 5 numeric characters

        EXAMPLE: 0               6       7      5      6




                                                    175
                                                                                 Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                       LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



32h.   LAST UNIT – Last Unit - Qwest-Specific Field

       Identifies the last unit in cable group by number within the inter-office or tie cable
       complement.

             NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

       USAGE:             This field is conditional.

           Transaction
              Type            R/O/C            Valid                          Business Rules
                                              Entries
                              I       R       I    R                  I                        R
        CFAQ Cable            C                             Required if the
        Facility Query                                      SEARCHTYP
        Section                                             field = U.
        CFAR Cable                    C                                           This field is populated when
        Pair Groups                                                               the RESPONSE field = G
        Section                                                                   and the SEARCHTYP field
                                                                                  = G.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                                  5 numeric characters

        EXAMPLE: 0                6       7      5      8




                                                     176
                                                              Effective October 25, 2010
                                                    LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



32i.     GROUPNUM – Number of CFA Groups - Qwest-Specific Field – Not
currently used by Qwest

       Identifies the total number of CFA groups.




                                            177
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



32j.   CABTYP – Cable Type - Qwest-Specific Field

       Identifies a facility in terms of gauge, load coil spacing, load coil inductance, or in terms of
       inter-office or tie cable type and modifier.

             NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

       USAGE:             This field is conditional.

         Transaction Type
                                  R/O/C        Valid                     Business Rules
                                             Entries
                                  I    R     I     R     I                        R
        CFAR Cable Pair                C                     This field is populated when the
        Groups Section                                       RESPONSE field = G and the
                                                             SEARCHTYP field = G.
        CFAR Cable Pair                C                     Required if the RESPONSE field = G and
        Units Section                                        the SEARCHTYP field = U.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           13 alphanumeric characters

        EXAMPLE: B               6     7    1     4     A




                                                178
                                                                            Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                  LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



32k.   INVSTAT – Inventory Status - Qwest-Specific Field

       Identifies the current status of the circuit.

             NOTE 1:        This field may be used on Responses.

       USAGE:              This field is conditional.

        Transaction Type
                                R/O/C                       Valid Entries                  Business Rules
                                I R           I                     R                  I             R
        CFAR Cable Pair             C             IE = In Effect                           This field is
        Groups Section                            PA = Pending Add                         populated when the
                                                  PC = Pending Change                      RESPONSE field =
                                                  PR = Pending Remove                      G and the
                                                  PX = Pending Retirement (for             SEARCHTYP field
                                                  equipment only)                          = G.
                                                  RP = Retired (for equipment only)
                                                  RM = Coded for removal when spare
                                                  (for equipment only)
        MPR PSS Section               C           Valid
                                                  Invalid
        MPR CCS                       C           Valid
        Section                                   Invalid

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:

       For the Transaction Type of CFAR: 2 alpha characters
       For the Transaction Type of MPR: 7 alphanumeric characters

        EXAMPLE:                  I       E




                                                   179
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



32l.   QTYSPARE – Quantity Spare - Qwest-Specific Field

       Identifies the Connecting Facility Assignments that are remaining.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

       USAGE:            This field is conditional.

        Transaction Type
                              R/O/C          Valid Entries                   Business Rules
                              I R        I           R          I                     R
        CFAR Cable Pair           C           0 to 99999            This field is populated when the
        Groups Section                                              RESPONSE field = G and the
                                                                    SEARCHTYP field = G.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           5 numeric characters

        EXAMPLE: 0              0    1       2     5




                                                 180
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



32m.   PCTAVAIL – Percent Available - Qwest-Specific Field

       Identifies the percent of remaining Connecting Facility Arrangements.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

       USAGE:            This field is conditional.

        Transaction Type
                              R/O/C          Valid Entries                  Business Rules
                              I R        I           R         I                     R
        CFAR Cable Pair           C           0 to 100             This field is populated when the
        Groups Section                                             RESPONSE field = G and the
                                                                   SEARCHTYP field = G.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          3 numeric characters

        EXAMPLE: 0             1     1




                                               181
                                                                    Effective October 25, 2010
                                                          LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



32n.    UNITNUM – Number of Units - Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently
used by Qwest

       Identifies the number of units for this request.




                                               182
                                                                           Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                 LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



32o.   UNIT – Unit - Qwest-Specific Field

       Identifies the unit number.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

       USAGE:             This field is conditional.

        Transaction Type
                              R/O/C           Valid Entries                  Business Rules
                              I R         I           R         I                     R
        CFAR Cable Pair          C             0 to 99999           This field is populated when the
        Units Section                                               RESPONSE field = G and the
                                                                    SEARCHTYP field = U.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                            5 numeric characters

        EXAMPLE: 0              0     0       2     1




                                                  183
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



32p.   SUBDF – Sub Division From - Qwest-Specific Field

       Identifies the routing from the originating Central Office.

             NOTE 1:      This field may be used on Responses.

       USAGE:             This field is conditional.

        Transaction Type
                                R/O/C       Valid Entries                     Business Rules
                                I R     I           R          I                       R
        CFAR Cable Pair            C         0 to 8                  This field is populated when the
        Units Section                                                RESPONSE field = G and the
                                                                     SEARCHTYP field = U.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           1 numeric character

        EXAMPLE:            1




                                              184
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



32q.   SUBDT – Sub Division To - Qwest-Specific Field

       Identifies the routing to the terminating Central Office.

             NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

       USAGE:             This field is conditional.

        Transaction Type
                                R/O/C        Valid Entries                  Business Rules
                                I R      I           R         I                     R
        CFAR Cable Pair            C          0 to 8               This field is populated when the
        Units Section                                              RESPONSE field = G and the
                                                                   SEARCHTYP field = U.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           1 numeric character

        EXAMPLE:            1




                                               185
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



32r.   ASGTRSTN – Assignment Restriction Code - Qwest-Specific Field

       Identifies the restrictions against a specific CFA.

             NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

       USAGE:             This field is conditional.

         Transaction Type
                                 R/O/C        Valid                     Business Rules
                                            Entries
                                 I    R     I     R      I                         R
        CFAR Cable Pair               C                      This field is populated when the
        Units Section                                        RESPONSE field = G and the
                                                             SEARCHTYP field = U.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           3 alpha characters

        EXAMPLE: A               P     H




                                               186
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



32s.   CURACT – Current Activity - Qwest-Specific Field

       Identifies the current activity regarding the Cable Pair Unit.

             NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

       USAGE:             This field is conditional.

        Transaction Type
                                R/O/C                  Valid Entries                      Business Rules
                                I R      I                     R                     I               R
        CFAR Cable Pair            C         A = Pending add or connect                   This field is
        Units Section                        D = Pending disconnect or move               populated when the
                                             H = Hold (reserve)                           RESPONSE field =
                                             J = Jumpered (working but CKT ID             G and the
                                             unknown)                                     SEARCHTYP field =
                                             P = Working (CAC entered)                    U.
                                             R = Reuse, rearrange, rename
                                             W = Working (CKT ID entered)                 This field repeats the
                                             Not Populated - No assignment                same number of
                                             $ = Spare history                            times as the value in
                                                                                          the UNITNUM field.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           1 alphanumeric character

        EXAMPLE:            P




                                              187
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



32t.   PNDACT – Pending Activity - Qwest-Specific Field

       Identifies the pending activity regarding the Cable Pair Unit.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

       USAGE:             This field is conditional.

        Transaction Type
                                R/O/C            Valid Entries                         Business Rules
                                I R     I                R                 I                      R
        CFAR Cable Pair            C        A = Pending add or                    This field is populated when
        Units Section                       connect                               the RESPONSE field = G and
                                            D = Pending disconnect or             the SEARCHTYP field = U.
                                            move
                                            H = Hold (reserve)
                                            J = Jumpered (working but
                                            CKT ID unknown)
                                            P = Working (CAC
                                            entered)
                                            R = Reuse, rearrange,
                                            rename
                                            W = Working (CKT ID
                                            entered)
                                            Not populated - No
                                            assignment
                                            $ = Spare history

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           1 alphanumeric character

        EXAMPLE:            P




                                              188
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



32u.   D – Diversity Indicator - Qwest-Specific Field

       Indicates the alternate transmission route.

             NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

       USAGE:             This field is conditional.

        Transaction Type
                                R/O/C        Valid Entries                   Business Rules
                                I R      I          R           I                     R
        CFAR Cable Pair            C          Y = Yes               This field is populated when the
        Units Section                                               RESPONSE field = G and the
                                                                    SEARCHTYP field = U.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           1 alpha character

        EXAMPLE:            Y




                                               189
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



32v.   CKTID/CLO – Circuit ID/Circuit Layout Order Number – Qwest-
       Specific Field
       Identifies the layout of the ECCKT.

            NOTE 1:      This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:          This field is conditional.

         Transaction Type
                               R/O/C        Valid                     Business Rules
                                          Entries
                               I    R     I     R      I                         R
        CFAR Cable Pair             C                      This field is populated when the
        Units Section                                      RESPONSE field = G and the
                                                           SEARCHTYP field = U.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                         45 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:

        1   0   1     T 1 Z F             1   5       A L B Q N M N E                   A L B S

       N M H T H A A




                                              190
                                                                               Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                     LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



32w.   DUEDT – Due Date - Qwest-Specific Field

       Identifies the date the CFA will be utilized.

             NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

       USAGE:             This field is conditional.

        Transaction Type
                                R/O/C           Valid Entries                   Business Rules
                                I R         I          R               I                    R
        CFAR Cable Pair            C             CCYYMMDD                   This field is populated when
        Units Section                                                       the RESPONSE field = G and
                                                                            the SEARCHTYP field = U.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                              8 numeric characters

        EXAMPLE:            2     0     0       1     1     0    2      7




                                                    191
                                                                     Effective October 25, 2010
                                                           LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



33.   LALOC – Listed Address Locality – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies the locality or community to be listed.




                                             192
                                                                           Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                 LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



33a.   CKTFORMAT – Circuit ID Format Type - Qwest-Specific Field

       Identifies the Circuit ID format type.

             NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires.

       USAGE:             This field is required.

          Transaction Type
                                  R/O/C         Valid Entries                  Business Rules
                                  I R               I         R        I               R
        DLRQ DLR Query            R         S = Serial
        Section                             T = Telephone
                                            C = Carrier
                                            M = Message
                                            Trunk
        DLRR DLR                        C                                  Populated only if the
        Response Section                                                   RESPONSE field = G.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          1 alphanumeric character

        EXAMPLE:            S




                                                193
                                                                               Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                     LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



33b.   SERNUMCKT – Serial Number Circuit – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the Circuit in Serial Number Format.

              NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

        VALID ENTRIES:
                     Format consists of the following components:
                     Prefix: 2 a/n – Optional – Space is also valid
                     Service Code & Modifier: 2-4 a, preceded by a slash (/) – Required
                     Serial Number: 1-6n, preceded by a slash (/) – Required
                     Suffix: 1-3 a/n, preceded by a slash (/) – Optional
                     CO Code: 2-4 a/n, preceded by a slash (/) – Required
                     Segment: 1-3 a/n, preceded by a slash (/) – Optional

        USAGE:             This field is conditional.

            Transaction
               Type          R/O/C         Valid Entries                       Business Rules
                             I R               I        R                   I                    R
        DLRQ DLR             C            See VALID              Required if the
        Query Section                     ENTRIES.               CKTFORMAT
                                                                 field = S.
        DLRR DLR                  C                                                   Populated only when
        Response                                                                      the RESPONSE
        Section                                                                       field = G.

                                                                                     Returned when the
                                                                                     CKTFORMAT field
                                                                                     = S.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS: 27 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:

        2    9   /   U G D A          /    1   2   3     4   5   6   / M S




                                                   194
                                                                                Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                      LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



33c.   TELNUMCKT – Telephone Number Circuit – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the Circuit in Telephone Number Format.

              NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

        VALID ENTRIES:

                     Format consists of the following components:
                     Prefix: 2 a/n – Optional – Space is also valid
                     Service Code & Modifier: 2-4 a, preceded by a slash (/) – Required
                     NPA: 3 n, preceded by a slash (/) – Required
                     NXX: 3 n, preceded by a slash (/) – Required
                     Line: 4 n, preceded by a slash (/) – Required
                     Extension: 1-5 a/n, preceded by a slash (/) – Optional
                     Segment: 1-3 a/n, preceded by a slash (/) – Optional

        USAGE:             This field is conditional.

            Transaction
               Type          R/O/C         Valid Entries                        Business Rules
                             I R               I        R                    I                    R
        DLRQ DLR             C            See VALID               Required if the
        Query Section                     ENTRIES.                CKTFORMAT
                                                                  field = T.
        DLRR DLR                  C                                                    Populated only when
        Response                                                                       the RESPONSE
        Section                                                                        field = G.

                                                                                          Returned when the
                                                                                          CKTFORMAT field
                                                                                          = T.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                                 30 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:

        2    9   /   T N C C          /    3   0   3     /    9   6   5   /   1   6   5   4




                                                   195
                                                                               Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                     LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



33d.   CARFACCKT – Carriers Facility Circuit – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the Circuit as a Carrier Facility.

              NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

        VALID ENTRIES:

                     Format consists of the following components:
                     Channel Group Number: 1-5 a/n – Required
                     Facility Type: 1-6 a/n, preceded by a slash (/) – Required
                     A Location CLLI Code: 8 or 11 a/n, preceded by a slash (/) – Required
                     Z Location CLLI Code: 8 or 11 a/n, preceded by a slash (/) – Required

        USAGE:             This field is conditional.

            Transaction
               Type          R/O/C      Valid Entries                          Business Rules
                             I R            I        R                      I                    R
        DLRQ DLR             C         See VALID                 Required if the
        Query Section                  ENTRIES.                  CKTFORMAT
                                                                 field = C.
        DLRR DLR                  C                                                   Populated only when
        Response                                                                      the RESPONSE
        Section                                                                       field = G.

                                                                                         Returned when the
                                                                                         CKTFORMAT field
                                                                                         = C.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                                36 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:

        1    0   1    /   T 1 Z F        /   1   5      /    A L B Q N M N E                /   A L B S

        N M H H A A




                                                 196
                                                                                Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                      LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



33e.   MSGTRKCKT – Message Trunk Circuit – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the Circuit as a Message trunk.

              NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

        VALID ENTRIES:

                     Format consists of the following components:
                     Trunk Number: 1-4 a/n – Required
                     Traffic Class: 1-2 a/n, preceded by a slash (/) – Required
                     Office Class: 1-2 a/n, preceded by a slash (/) – Required
                     Traffic Use Code: 2 a/n, preceded by a slash (/) – Required
                     Traffic Modifier: 1-7 a/n, preceded by a slash (/) – Optional
                     A Location CLLI Code: 8 or 11 a/n, preceded by a slash (/) – Required
                     Pulse & Direction: 2 a/n, preceded by a slash (/) – Optional
                     Z Location CLLI Code: 8 or 11 a/n, preceded by a slash (/) – Required

        USAGE:             This field is conditional.

            Transaction
               Type          R/O/C         Valid Entries                        Business Rules
                             I R               I        R                  I                      R
        DLRQ DLR             C            See VALID               Required if the
        Query Section                     ENTRIES.                CKTFORMAT
                                                                  field = M.
        DLRR DLR                  C                                                    Populated only when
        Response                                                                       the RESPONSE
        Section                                                                        field = G.

                                                                                          Returned when the
                                                                                          CKTFORMAT field
                                                                                          = M.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                                 48 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:

        2    9   /   U G D A          /    1   2   3     4    5   6   / M S




                                                   197
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



33f.   DLRHDR – Design Layout Record Header – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the DLR header information.

            NOTE 1:      This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:          This field is conditional.

           Transaction Type
                                    R/O/C         Valid                  Business Rules
                                                 Entries
                                    I    R      I      R     I                   R
        DLRR DLR Response                C                       Populated only when the
        Section                                                  RESPONSE field = G.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                         80 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:

        T H I      S      I   S      H E A D E R                 I N F O




                                             198
                                                                      Effective October 25, 2010
                                                            LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



33g.   NUMDLRDTL – Number of Design Layout Record Details – Qwest-
       Specific Field – Not currently used by Qwest
       Identifies the number of Design Layout record Details.




                                            199
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



33h.   DLRDTL – Design Layout Record Details – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the Design Layout record Details.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:           This field is conditional.

         Transaction Type
                                 R/O/C        Valid                     Business Rules
                                            Entries
                                 I   R      I     R      I                     R
        DLRR DLR                     C                       Populated only when the RESPONSE
        Response Section                                     field = G.

                                                             Repeats the same number of times as the
                                                             value in the NUMDLRDTL field.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           80 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:

       D E T A I           L S        T O             F O L L O W




                                              200
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



33i.   REQUAL – Re-qualification – Qwest-Specific Field
       Indicates the CLEC’s desire for IMA to submit the TN for auto re-qualification queries.

            NOTE 1:       This field is used when the Loop Qualification for Qwest Broadband or
                          Unbundled ADSL result in a not qualified response.

            NOTE 2:       This field may be used on Inquires.

        VALID ENTRIES:

                  Y = Yes, submit for auto re-qualification if the Loop Qual result is not qualified.
                  N = No, do not submit for auto re-qualification if the Loop Qual result is not
                  qualified.

        USAGE:           This field is optional.

         Transaction Type
                                 R/O/C        Valid                       Business Rules
                                            Entries
                                 I    R     I     R             I                      R
        LQQ Query by             O
        WTN Section

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          1 alpha character

       EXAMPLE:           Y




                                              201
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



33j.   REQUALEMAIL – Re-qualification Contact Email – Qwest-Specific
       Field
       Identifies the email address to which Qwest should send a message when a TN submitted for
       auto re-qualification is qualified for the requested service.

            NOTE 1:      This field may be used on Inquires.

        USAGE:          This field is conditional.

         Transaction Type
                               R/O/C         Valid                    Business Rules
                                           Entries
                               I    R      I     R                  I                   R
        LQQ Query by           C                          Required if the
        WTN Section                                       REQUAL field = Y.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                         60 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:

       D S M I        T H @ Q W E S T                 .    C O M




                                             202
                                                                       Effective October 25, 2010
                                                             LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



34.   FTWP – Foreign Township – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies the section of a directory or a separate directory when a customer’s telephone
      number is serviced out of another exchange.




                                            203
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



34a.   SERCD – Hi Capacity or Design Service Facilities – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the first two characters of the NC code that is related to Hi Capacity or Design
       Service facilities.

             NOTE 1:      This field may be used on Inquires.

        USAGE:           This field is conditional.

         Transaction Type
                                 R/O/C          Valid Entries                  Business Rules
                                 I R                I             R                 I                R
        FAQ RPL or RFR           C         First two                  Required if the SCATEG
        Section                            characters of the          field = H or D.
                                           NC code

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          2 alpha characters

        EXAMPLE:

        L    G




                                              204
                                                                           Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                 LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



34b.   USOC – Universal Service Order Code – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies a code that is associated with a change for the service.

             NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires.

        USAGE:            This field is conditional.

            Transaction Type
                                      R/O/C         Valid                    Business Rules
                                                   Entries
                                      I    R      I      R                       I                 R
        FAQ RPL or RFR                C                         Required if the SCATEG field = H
        Section                                                 or D.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           5 alphanumeric characters

        EXAMPLE:

        2    F   G    B    X




                                               205
                                                                           Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                 LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



34c.   MUXLOC – MUX Location – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the CLLI Code for the wire center in which the MUX equipment resides.

             NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires.

        USAGE:            This field is optional.

            Transaction
               Type            R/O/C       Valid Entries                  Business Rules
                               I R             I         R                     I                   R
        FAQ RPL or             O        CLLI Code            Optional if the SCATEG field = H
        RFR Section                     for wire center      or D.
                                        location.
                                                             CLEC must determine if MUXing
                                                             is necessary for the desired
                                                             CLSERV, SERCD, and USOC.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                         8 alphanumeric characters

        EXAMPLE:

        D    N   V   R     C    O   D    N




                                               206
                                                                           Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                 LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



34d.   TNADDRCKTIND – Telephone Number, Address, Circuit Indicator –
       Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies whether TN, Address or Circuit is being used to do the search.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires.

        USAGE:           This field is required.

            Transaction Type
                                      R/O/C          Valid Entries              Business Rules
                                      I R                I         R                 I                 R
        FAQ Telephone Number          R            T = TN              The entry in this field must
        Address Circuit                            A = Address         = A if the SCATEG filed =
        Indicator Section                          C = Circuit         I, H, or D.
                                                   ID
                                                                       The entry in this field may
                                                                       = A, T, or C, if the entry in
                                                                       the SCATEG field = U.

                                                                       The entry in this field may
                                                                       = A, or T, if the SCATEG
                                                                       field = P.
        RLDQ                          R            T = TN
                                                   A = Address
                                                   C = Circuit
                                                   ID
        LQQ Loop Qualification        R            T = TN
        Query Section                              A = Address

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          1 alphanumeric character

        EXAMPLE:

        A




                                              207
                                                                           Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                 LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



34e.   NUMPT – Number of Ports – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies if the facility check is for one or two locations.

        USAGE:            Populated by Qwest.

            Transaction Type
                                       R/O/C        Valid Entries              Business Rules
                                       I R               I        R                I               R
        FAQ Telephone                  N          1 = Facility
        Number Address                            available for
        Circuit Indicator                         one location
        Section                                   (Location A)
                                                  2 = Facility
                                                  available for
                                                  two locations
                                                  (Location A
                                                  & Z)

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           2 numeric characters

        EXAMPLE:

        0    1




                                                208
                                                                           Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                 LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



34f.   LOOPCHAR – Loop Characteristics – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the type of loop the facility check is being done for.

             NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires.

        USAGE:            This field is conditional.

               Transaction Type
                                             R/O/C        Valid Entries          Business Rules
                                             I R              I         R             I            R
        FAQ Telephone Number                 C         L = Loaded            Required when the
        Address Circuit Indicator                      N = Non-              SCATEG field = U.
        Section                                        loaded
                                                       D = Does not
                                                       matter

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           1 alpha character

        EXAMPLE:

        L




                                               209
                                                                           Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                 LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



34g.   FACDES – Facility Designation – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the designation of the CFA.

             NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires.

        USAGE:            This field is optional.

            Transaction
               Type            R/O/C          Valid                      Business Rules
                                             Entries
                               I    R      I       R                         I                     R
        FAQ CFA                O                          Optional when the SCATEG field = H or
        Section                                           D.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           5 alphanumeric characters

        EXAMPLE:

        R    F   T    0    1




                                                210
                                                                            Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                  LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



34h.   FACTYP – Facility Type – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the facility type related to the CFA.

             NOTE 1:        This field may be used on Inquires.

        USAGE:             This field is conditional.

        Transaction Type
                                R/O/C         Valid                       Business Rules
                                             Entries
                                I    R      I      R                          I                     R
        FAQ CFA                 C                          Required if the FACDES field is
        Section                                            populated.

                                                           Optional if the SCATEG field = H or D.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                            6 alphanumeric characters

        EXAMPLE:

        R    F    T    0    1




                                                211
                                                                           Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                 LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



34i.   CHAN – Channel – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the type of channel related to the CFA.

             NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires.

        USAGE:            This field is conditional.

            Transaction
               Type           R/O/C      Valid Entries                   Business Rules
                              I R            I        R                       I                    R
        FAQ CFA               C         DS1 = 1-24            Required when the FACDES field is
        Section                         DS3 = 1-28            populated.

                                                              Optional when the SCATEG field =
                                                              H or D.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           2 numeric characters

        EXAMPLE:

        1    2




                                               212
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



34j.   QUALEXIST – Qualify Existing – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the need to qualify the existing Telephone Numbers.

             NOTE 1:      This field may be used on Inquires.

        USAGE:           This field is optional.

            Transaction Type
                                     R/O/C                   Valid Entries           Business Rules
                                     I    R                      I             R       I        R
        LQQ Unbundled                O              Y = Qualify Existing
        ADSL Loop Section                           telephone numbers
                                                    N = Do not Qualify
                                                    Existing telephone
                                                    numbers

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                         1 alpha character

        EXAMPLE:

        Y




                                              213
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



34k.   DSLSERV – DSL Service – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies what type of DSL the facility check is being done for.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires.

        USAGE:           This field is optional.

                 Transaction Type
                                                   R/O/C          Valid Entries          Business
                                                                                          Rules
                                                   I   R            I             R     I       R
        LQQ Unbundled ADSL Loop                    O        A = ADSL
        Section

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           1 alpha character

        EXAMPLE:

        A




                                              214
                                                                             Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                   LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



34l.   WLINUM – Working Lines Left In – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the number of lines left on the facility.

             NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:            This field is conditional.

            Transaction
               Type           R/O/C         Valid                        Business Rules
                                          Entries
                              I    R      I     R      I                          R
        FAR POTS                   C           0-99           Required if the RESPONSE field = G and
        Section                                               the SCATEG field = P.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           2 numeric characters

        EXAMPLE:

        0     7




                                                215
                                                                              Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                    LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



34m.   DSVC – Dual Service Availability – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the Dual Service Availability.

        USAGE:

            IMA GUI: This field is required.

          Transaction
             Type             R/O/C              Valid Entries                      Business Rules
                              I   R      I               R                              I             R
        FAR POTS                  R          Not Available
        Section                              Available

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                            13 alpha characters

       EXAMPLE:               N     o    t          A      v    a      i    l   a    b   l    e

            IMA XML: This field is required.

          Transaction
             Type             R/O/C              Valid Entries                      Business Rules
                              I   R      I               R                              I             R
        FAR POTS                  R          0 = Not Available
        Section                              1 = Available

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                            1 alphanumeric character

       EXAMPLE:               1




                                              216
                                                                                Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                      LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



34n.   REMINDER – Dual Service Reminder – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the reminder for Dual Service.


        USAGE:           This field is conditional.

          Transaction
             Type             R/O/C                Valid Entries                       Business Rules
                              I   R      I                  R                    I                R
        FAR POTS                  C              REMINDER: Check                     This field is required if
        Section                                  both service addresses              DSVC = 1, otherwise
                                                                                     prohibited.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                               38 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:           R    E    M        I    N    D      E   R      :           C   H   E     C    K

                          B    O    T    H             S      E   R     V    I       C   E        A     D    D

                          R    E    S    S        E    S




                                                 217
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120




34o.   LINESTAT – Line Status – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the state of the lines requested.

             NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:            This field is conditional.

         Transaction
            Type            R/O/C         Valid Entries                    Business Rules
                            I R       I          R          I                      R
        FAR POTS               C           A = Available        This field may be populated when the
        Section                            H = Held             SCATEG field = P and the
                                           Order                RESPONSE field = G.
                                           S = Available
                                           (SDT)                This field repeats the same number of
                                                                times as the value in the QLR field.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           1 alphanumeric character

        EXAMPLE:

        A




                                                218
                                                                             Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                   LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



34p.   REMARK – Remark – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies additional information related to the lines requested.

             NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:            This field is conditional.

          Transaction           R/O/C                               Business Rules
             Type
                                I       R   I                               R
        FAR POTS                        C       This field may be populated when the SCATEG field = P
        Section                                 and the RESPONSE field = G.

                                                This field repeats the same number of times as the value in
                                                the QLR field.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                             255 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:

        T H I       S       I       S       A      G O O D            L   I N E




                                                   219
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120




34q.   PRODNOTNUM – Products Not Supported Number – Qwest-Specific
       Field- Not currently used by Qwest
       Identifies the number of products the loop facilities do not support.




                                              220
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



34r.   PRODNOTSUP – Products Not Supported – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the products that are not supported within the central office switch.

             NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:           This field is conditional.

         Transaction
            Type          R/O/C         Valid Entries                    Business Rules
                          I R       I          R          I                      R
        FAR POTS              C          Message              Present only when, the SCATEG field =
        Section                          Waiting              P and the RESPONSE field = G.
                                         Indicator –
                                         Visual not           Returned only if the central office switch
                                         supported            does not support certain
                                         Dual Service         products/features.
                                         not supported
                                         Caller ID not
                                         supported

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          100 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:

        D U A L            S E R V I           C E         N O T          S U P P O R T E

        D




                                              221
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



34s.     PENDNUM – Pending Order Number – Qwest-Specific Field – Not
currently used by Qwest
       Identifies the number of pending orders for the end user address.




                                             222
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



34t.   PDORDERTYP – Pending Order Type – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the type of order pending at the end user address.

             NOTE 1:      This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:           This field is optional.

        Transaction Type
                               R/O/C         Valid Entries                     Business Rules
                               I R       I           R                 I                 R
        FAR POTS                  O          C = Change                    Populated only if the
        Pending Order                        N = New                       RESPONSE field = G, the
        Section                              T = Outside Move              SCATEG field = P.
                                             D = Disconnect
                                             F = From
                                             R = Record
                                             Changes

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                         2 alpha characters

       EXAMPLE:

        C




                                              223
                                                                              Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                    LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



34u.   ORDNUM – Order Number – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the order number related to the pending order type.

            NOTE 1:         This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:             This field is optional.

         Transaction Type
                                     R/O/C        Valid                     Business Rules
                                                 Entries
                                     I       R   I    R      I                        R
        FAR POTS                             O                   Populated only if the RESPONSE field =
        Pending Order                                            G, the SCATEG field = P.
        Section

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                               8 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:

        A C 1      3   6     8   J       J




                                                  224
                                                                           Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                 LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



34v.   PDORDERDD – Pending Order Due Date – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the due date for the pending order.

             NOTE 1:         This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:              This field is optional.

        Transaction Type
                                  R/O/C         Valid Entries               Business Rules
                                  I R       I          R          I                   R
        FAR POTS                     O           CCYYMMDD              Populated only if the
        Pending Order                                                  RESPONSE field = G, the
        Section                                                        SCATEG field = P.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                            8 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:

        2   0   0   1   1     0   2   3




                                                 225
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



34w.   LOCANFACS – Location A Facility Status – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the status of the Location A facility.

             NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:            This field is conditional.

         Transaction Type
                                R/O/C       Valid                      Business Rules
                                           Entries
                                 I   R     I    R      I                          R
        FAR Private Line             C                     Populated only if the RESPONSE field = G,
        or Frame Relay                                     the SCATEG field = H or D, the Location A
        Section                                            address is present on the query, and the CFA
                                                           Section is not present.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           2 numeric characters

       EXAMPLE:

        1   1




                                               226
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



34x.   LOCARMKS – Location A Remarks – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies any additional comments pertinent to Location A.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:          This field is conditional.

         Transaction Type          R/O/C                         Business Rules
                                   I R     I                              R
        FAR Private Line or           C        Populated only if the RESPONSE field = G, the
        Frame Relay Section                    SCATEG field = H or D, the Location A address is
                                               present on the query, and the CFA Section is not
                                               present.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                         255 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:

        T H I      S       I   S      A        G O O D           L   I N E




                                               227
                                                                            Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                  LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



34y.   LOCZNFACS – Location Z Facility Status – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the status of the Location Z facility.

              NOTE 1:      This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:            This field is conditional.

            Transaction Type
                                  R/O/C       Valid                        Business Rules
                                             Entries
                                   I   R     I    R        I                        R
        FAR Private Line               C                       Populated only if the RESPONSE field =
        or Frame Relay                                         G, the SCATEG field = H or D, and the
        Section                                                Location Z address is present on the query.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           2 numeric characters

       EXAMPLE:

        1    2




                                               228
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



34z.   LOCZRMKS – Location Z Remarks – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies any additional comments pertinent to Location Z.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:           This field is conditional.

          Transaction Type         R/O/C                           Business Rules
                                   I R        I                             R
        FAR Private Line or           C           Populated only if the RESPONSE field = G, the
        Frame Relay Section                       SCATEG field = H or D, and the Location Z
                                                  address is present on the query.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          255 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:

        T H I      S       I   S      A       G O O D            L   I N E




                                              229
                                                                              Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                    LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



34aa.   MUXST – MUX Status – Qwest-Specific Field
        Identifies the availability/status of the MUX facilities.

               NOTE 1:      This field may be used on Responses.

         USAGE:            This field is conditional.

             Transaction Type
                                    R/O/C         Valid Entries                 Business Rules
                                    I R       I          R            I                  R
         FAR Private Line or           C           Y = MUX                Populated only if the
         Frame Relay Section                       Available              RESPONSE field = G, and the
                                                   N = MUX Not            SCATEG field = D or H
                                                   Available
                                                   BLANK =                Required if the MUXLOC field
                                                   MUX not                is present on the query.
                                                   Queried

        DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           1 alpha character

        EXAMPLE:

         Y




                                                  230
                                                                           Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                 LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



34ab.   CFAST – CFA Status – Qwest-Specific Field
        Identifies the status of the CFA.

              NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

         USAGE:           This field is conditional.

           Transaction Type
                                   R/O/C         Valid Entries               Business Rules
                                   I R       I          R          I                  R
         FAR Private Line or          C           CFA OK               Populated only if the
         Frame Relay Section                      CFA                  RESPONSE field = G, and the
                                                  CONFLICT             SCATEG field = D or H

                                                                       Required if the CFA Section is
                                                                       present on the query.

        DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          12 alpha characters

        EXAMPLE:

         C F A          O K




                                                 231
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



35.   ALTADDNUM - Alternate Addresses
      Identifies the number of alternative addresses in response to the inquiry for address validation.


       USAGE:           Populated by Qwest.

         Transaction          R/O/C                              Business Rules
            Type
                              I      R                   I                             R
       AVR –                         N
       Supplemental
       Information
       Section

      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                         3 numeric characters

      EXAMPLE:

               3




                                             232
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



35a.   DESCRIPTIVE – Descriptive Address – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies a descriptive phrase, which is part of the address.


             NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:            This field is optional.

          Transaction Type
                                  R/O/C       Valid                      Business Rules
                                             Entries
                                  I    R     I    R      I                           R
        AVR – Remark                   O                     If the address contains a phrase describing
        Information Section                                  it, this field will contain the phrase; e.g.
                                                             “White House” for 1600 Pennsylvania
                                                             Ave.

                                                             This field repeats the same number of
                                                             times as the value in the NMNUM field.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           67 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:

       W H I        T E        H O U S E




                                               233
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



35b.   ALTERNATE STREET – Alternate Street – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies any other street besides the one specified on the query.


             NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:           This field is optional.

           Transaction Type
                                     R/O/C            Valid     Business Rules
                                                     Entries
                                     I    R        I       R      I          R
        AVR – Address Section             O

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           67 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:

        T H E          M A L L            @          P A R K          M E A D O W S




                                              234
                                                                   Effective October 25, 2010
                                                         LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



35c.   PNARMKNUM – Number of Primary Number Address Remarks –
       Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently used by Qwest
       Identifies the number Primary Number Address Remarks returned.




                                          235
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



35d.   PNARMK – Primary Number Address Remarks – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies additional pertinent information to a basic address.

             NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:            This field is optional.

            Transaction
               Type           R/O/C        Valid                         Business Rules
                                         Entries
                              I    R     I     R     I                          R
        AVR – Address              O                     Provides instructions for entering address
        Section                                          correctly (e.g., Use Loc, Apt # or Ltr), status
                                                         information (e.g., Stat non-work).

                                                         PNARMK field is returned even when the
                                                         information requested in the remark is present
                                                         in the query.

                                                         This field may repeat up to 5 times.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                         80 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:

        B    I G       B A R N              I N          B A C K




                                               236
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



35e.   SLRMK – Service Location Remarks – Qwest-Specific Field
       Provides instructions for using the DES (DESCRIPTION) FID on an order.

            NOTE 1:     This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:         This field is optional.

           Transaction Type
                                  R/O/C             Valid                   Business Rules
                                                   Entries
                                   I    R        I       R         I                    R
        AVR – Address Section           O                               Provides instructions for using
                                                                        the DES (Description) FID on
                                                                        an order.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                         100 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:

       B   I G        R E D            B A R N               I N       B A C K




                                            237
                                                                             Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                   LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



35f.   SITEID – Site ID – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the Qwest representation of the servicing wire center as either an NPANXX or a
       CLLI Code.

            NOTE 1:        This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

        USAGE:            This field is conditional.

          Transaction
             Type            R/O/C            Valid Entries                          Business Rules
                             I R             I           R                       I                     R
       AVR – Switch                C                                                          This value is
       Section                                                                                necessary for use in
                                                                                              TN reservation
                                                                                              Query.
       CTQ –                 C                                        Required if TXTYP =
       Administrative                                                 B.
       Section
       CTR -                       C                   Echo from                              Required if TXTYP
       Administrative                                  Query                                  = B.
       Section
       TNAQ –                R          Address                       CLEC needs to fill in
       Information                      Validation                    value received from a
       Section                          -                             prior Address
                                                                      Validation.
                                        Central:
                                        NPA,
                                        NXX

                                        Eastern:
                                        NPANXX

                                        Western: 8
                                        character
                                        CLLI code

                                        CNUM –
                                        8 character
                                        CLLI code
       TNAR –                      R
       Availability
       Response Section
       TNSQ, TNSR–           R     R                                  Identifies NPANXX or
       Administrative                                                 CLLI code.
       Section

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           8 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:

       D N V R C O D V




                                               238
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



35g.   TTA – Traffic Terminating Area – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the TN or CLLI Code identifying where call ends.

             NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

        USAGE:            This field is conditional.

            Transaction
               Type           R/O/C           Valid Entries                     Business Rules
                              I R             I            R              I                   R
        AVR – Switch              C                                               This value is necessary
        Section                                                                   for use in TN reservation
                                                                                  Query.
        TNAQ –                  R       Address                    CLEC needs
        Information                     Validation-                to fill in the
        Section                         15                         3-15
                                        characters                 character
                                                                   TTA value
                                        CNUM –                     received from
                                        10                         a prior
                                        characters                 Address
                                                                   Validation.
        TNAR –                      R                   Echo
        Availability                                    from
        Response                                        Query
        Section
        TNSQ, TNSR –            R   R                   Echo       Identifies TN
        Administrative                                  from       or CLLI
        Section                                         Query      Code
                                                                   identifying
                                                                   where call
                                                                   ends.
        CTQ, CTR –              C   C                   Echo       Required if      Required if TXTYP = B.
        Administrative                                  from       TXTYP = B.
        Section                                         Query

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           15 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:

        3      0    3       9       6     5




                                               239
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



35h.   RATEZONE – Rate Zone – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the specific geographical location used for determining rates.

             NOTE 1:      This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:           This field is conditional.

            Transaction Type
                                   R/O/C          Valid       Business Rules
                                                 Entries
                                   I    R      I       R        I        R
        AVR – Switch Section            C

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          5 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:

        3    0   3 B 9




                                              240
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



35i.   SWTYPNUM – Switch Type Number – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the number of switch types being returned.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:           This field is conditional.

          Transaction Type
                                   R/O/C          Valid        Business Rules
                                                 Entries
                                   I    R      I       R         I       R
        AVR – Switch Section            C

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          3 numeric characters

        EXAMPLE:

         0 0 2




                                              241
                                                                              Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                    LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



35j.   SWTYP – Switch Type – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the list of switch types for a multi-switch LSO.

             NOTE 1:        This field may be used on Responses.

        VALID ENTRIES:
              1AESS
              1ESS
              2BESS
              2ESS
              3ESS
              3XB
              5ESS
              5RSM
              5XB
              DMS10
              DMS100
              ERICSO
              ERICSS
              RSS
              SXS

        USAGE:             This field is conditional.

            Transaction
               Type              R/O/C       Valid Entries                     Business Rules
                                 I R     I          R           I                        R
        AVR – Switch                C         See VALID               This field will repeat the same
        Section                               ENTRIES.                number of times as the value in the
                                                                      SWTYPNUM field.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                            6 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:

        1    A    E    S     S




                                                242
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



35k.   SWIND – Switch Indicator – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies whether the LSO has a single-switch or multi-switches.

            NOTE 1:        This field may be used on Responses.

        VALID ENTRIES:
          MULTI       =            Multiple switches available in the LSO
          SINGLE      =            Multiple switches not available in the LSO
          UNAVAILABLE =            Could not get the multi-switches for the LSO since backend
                                   systems down

        USAGE:            This field is required.

           Transaction
              Type            R/O/C         Valid Entries                  Business Rules
                              I R       I          R        I                        R
        AVR – Switch             R           See VALID            This field will repeat the same
        Section                              ENTRIES.             number of times as the value in the
                                                                  SWTYPNUM field.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS                          11 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:

           S     I    N      G     L     E




                                               243
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



35l.   ISDNFLAG – ISDN Indicator – Qwest-Specific Field
       Indicates if the facilities can support ISDN.

             NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:           This field is conditional.

            Transaction Type
                                   R/O/C         Valid Entries                Business Rules
                                   I R       I          R           I                   R
        FAR ISDN Loop                  C          Y = ISDN              This section is present only if
        Qualification Section                     Capable               the SCATEG field = I and the
                                                  N = Not ISDN          RESPONSE field = G.
                                                  Capable
                                                                        Required if the SCATEG = I.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           1 alphanumeric character

       EXAMPLE:

        Y




                                              244
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



35m.   SN56FLAG – Switched Net 56 Indicator – Qwest-Specific Field
       Indicates if the facilities are Switched Net 56 Capable or not.

             NOTE 1:      This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:           This field is conditional.

            Transaction Type
                                   R/O/C         Valid Entries                 Business Rules
                                   I R       I           R          I                    R
        FAR ISDN Loop                  C          Y = Switched           This section is present only if
        Qualification Section                     Net 56 Capable         the SCATEG field = I and the
                                                  N = Not                RESPONSE field = G.
                                                  Switched Net
                                                  56 Capable             Required if the SCATEG = I.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          1 alphanumeric character

       EXAMPLE:

        Y




                                              245
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



35n.   CC64FLAG – Clear Channel Capable Indicator – Qwest-Specific Field
       Indicates if the facilities are 64kbps Clear Channel Capable or not.

             NOTE 1:      This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:           This field is conditional.

            Transaction Type
                                   R/O/C         Valid Entries               Business Rules
                                   I R       I          R          I                   R
        FAR ISDN Loop                  C          Y = 64kbps           This section is present only if
        Qualification Section                     Clear Channel        the SCATEG field = I and the
                                                  Capable              RESPONSE field = G.
                                                  N = Not
                                                  64kbps Clear         Required if the SCATEG = I.
                                                  Channel
                                                  Capable

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          1 alphanumeric character

       EXAMPLE:

        Y




                                              246
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



35o.   X75FLAG – X.75 Capability Indicator – Qwest-Specific Field
       Indicates if the facilities are X.75 capable or not.

             NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:            This field is conditional.

            Transaction Type
                                    R/O/C         Valid Entries               Business Rules
                                    I R       I          R          I                   R
        FAR ISDN Loop                   C          Y = X.75             This section is present only if
        Qualification Section                      Capable              the SCATEG field = I and the
                                                   N = Not X.75         RESPONSE field = G.
                                                   Capable
                                                                        Required if the SCATEG = I.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           1 alphanumeric character

       EXAMPLE:

        Y




                                               247
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



35p.    DESCNUM – Description Number – Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently
used by Qwest
       Identifies how many descriptions are being returned.




                                            248
                                                                            Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                  LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



35q.   LINESNUM – Number of Lines – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the number of lines returned on this request.

             NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:           This field is conditional.

            Transaction Type
                                     R/O/C        Valid                      Business Rules
                                                Entries
                                      I   R     I     R      I                        R
        FAR ISDN Loop                     O                        This section is present only if the
        Qualification Section                                      SCATEG field = I and the
                                                                   RESPONSE field = G.

                                                                   Required if SCATEG = I.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          2 numeric characters

       EXAMPLE:

        0   2




                                              249
                                                                              Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                    LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



35r.   DESC – Description – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies further descriptors for the facilities ordered.

             NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:            This field is conditional.

              Transaction Type              R/O/C                           Business Rules
                                            I R        I                             R
        FAR ISDN Loop                          O             This section is present only if the SCATEG
        Qualification Section                                field = I and the RESPONSE field = G.

                                                             Required if the SCATEG = I.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                               500 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:

        T H I       S       I   S       A       G O O D                L   I N E




                  NOTE 1:        In order to conserve space, only 250 spaces are shown here. The
                                 actual field length is 500 spaces.




                                                250
                                                              Effective October 25, 2010
                                                    LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



35s.    LINENUM – Number of Lines – Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently
used by Qwest
       Identifies the number of lines requested.




                                              251
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



35t.   SERVON – Served On – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the type of loop (BRI, Analog, etc.).

             NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:           This field is optional.

           Transaction
              Type            R/O/C         Valid                       Business Rules
                                           Entries
                              I    R     I     R          I                   R
        FAR Unbundled              O       COPPER             If SERVON = FTTP, you cannot resell
        Loop Section                       FIBER              data services.
                                           FTTP
                                                              This field is populated if the SCATEG
                                                              field = U and the RESPONSE field = G.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                         20 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:

        A N A L O G                L   I N E




                                              252
                                                                           Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                 LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



35u.   LOAD – Loading – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the capacity of the loop.

              NOTE 1:      This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:            This field is optional.

            Transaction Type
                                    R/O/C       Valid                    Business Rules
                                              Entries
                                    I    R    I     R     I                        R
        FAR Unbundled                    O                    This field is populated if the SCATEG
        Loop Section                                          field = U and the RESPONSE field = G.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                            15 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:

        2     4     A       C   I       R C U I     T S




                                               253
                                                                       Effective October 25, 2010
                                                             LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



35v.   MOVE – Can be Moved To – Qwest-Specific Field
       Indicates whether POTS can actually be moved to Unbundled Loop and whether
       loading/unloading is required.

            NOTE 1:     This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:         This field is optional.

         Transaction Type
                              R/O/C         Valid                    Business Rules
                                          Entries
                               I    R     I     R     I                        R
        FAR Unbundled               O                     This field is populated if the SCATEG
        Loop Section                                      field = U and the RESPONSE field = G.



       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                        60 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:

       U N B U N D L E D                     L O O P           A V A I           L

       A B L E




                                            254
                                                                           Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                 LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



36.   DSIND - Dispatch Indicator
      Indicates if the address of the inquiry requires a dispatch to the end user’s premises.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

       USAGE:           This field is conditional.

         Transaction
            Type           R/O/C         Valid Entries                      Business Rules
                           I R       I           R           I                      R
       FAR – POTS              C          Y = Yes                 Present if the SCATEG field = P and
       Section                            N = No –                the RESPONSE field = G.
                                          Qwest-Specific
                                          entry.                  This field repeats the same number
                                                                  of times as the value of the QLR
                                                                  field.

      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          1 alphanumeric character

      EXAMPLE:             Y




                                             255
                                                                     Effective October 25, 2010
                                                           LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



36a.    NMNUM – Near Match Number – Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently
used by Qwest
       Indicates the number of Near Match Addresses returned.




                                           256
                                                                   Effective October 25, 2010
                                                         LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



36b.     MCNUM – Multiple CALA Match Number – Qwest-Specific Field – Not
currently used by Qwest
       Identifies the number of Multiple CALA Matches.




                                          257
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



36c.   HNRANGE – House Number Range – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the near match addresses from the lowest – highest.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:           This field is optional.

        Transaction
        Type                   R/O/C                Valid Entries               Business Rules
                              I     R              I            R              I               R
        AVR Multiple                O                      Format is                    Repeats the
        and Near                                           “lowno. –                    same
        Match Section                                      highno.”                     number of
                                                                                        times as the
                                                                                        value in the
                                                                                        NMNUM
                                                                                        field.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           25 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE: 1             5    -    2    0




                                                 258
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



36d.   RANGEIND – Range Indicator – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies if the address ranges are odd, even, both or unnumbered.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:           This field is optional.

        Transaction
        Type                   R/O/C               Valid Entries              Business Rules
                              I     R          I            R                I               R
        AVR Multiple                O                O = Odd                          Repeats the
        and Near                                     E = Even                         same
        Match Section                                B = Both                         number of
                                                     S = Unnumbered                   times as the
                                                                                      value in the
                                                                                      NMNUM
                                                                                      field.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                         1 alpha character

       EXAMPLE: O




                                              259
                                                                            Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                  LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



37.   APPRD - Appointment Request Date
      Identifies the desired date/time period requested by the customer during which the end user’s
      service will be established and/or a technician will be scheduled to visit the end user’s
      premises.

           NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires.

      VALID ENTRIES:

           U.S. Standard – Not currently used by Qwest. Metric Format - CCYYMMDD

           Two Digit Month (01-12)                              Two Digit Century (00-99)
           Two Digit Day (01-31)                                Two Digit Year (00-99)
           Two Digit Century (00-99)                            Two Digit Month (01-12)
           Two Digit Year (00-99)                               Two Digit Day (01-31)
           AM or PM                                             AM or PM – Not currently used by Qwest

       USAGE:           This field is optional.

        Transaction Type
                                 R/O/C         Valid Entries                    Business Rules
                                 I R               I         R                        I                 R
       AAQ –                     O           See VALID               An appointment date entered
       Appointment                           ENTRIES.                may not be greater than 345 days
       Request Section                                               past the current date.

                                                                     Available appointments may not
                                                                     be beyond 20 days from the
                                                                     requested date.
       ASQ Appointment           O
       Selection Section

      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                              8 alphanumeric characters

      EXAMPLE:               2       0   0     1     0      9    1    5




                                               260
                                                                      Effective October 25, 2010
                                                            LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



37a.   QNCNUM – Quantity of Non-Cancelled Telephone Numbers – Qwest-
       Specific Field – Not currently used by Qwest
       Identifies the quantity of Non-Cancelled Telephone Numbers for this transaction.




                                            261
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



37b.   NCTN – Non-Cancelled Telephone Number – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the Non-Cancelled Telephone Number for this transaction.

            NOTE 1:      This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:          This field is conditional.

          Transaction Type
                                 R/O/C          Valid Entries                Business Rules
                                 I R       I            R          I                  R
        CTR Non-Cancelled           C           Dashes are             Populated if the RESPONSE
        Telephone Number                        required in            field = M.
        Section                                 positions 4 and
                                                8.                     This field repeats the same
                                                                       number of times as the value
                                                                       in the QNCNUM field.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                         12 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE: 3            0    3    -   9     6   5    -   6   7    4     5




                                               262
                                                                           Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                 LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



38.   APPRES – Appoint Response Date – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies if the date is available at the time the inquiry is received.




                                               263
                                                                              Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                    LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



38a.   POTSSPLIT – POTS Splitter – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the POTS Splitter.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

        USAGE:           This field is conditional.

         Transaction
            Type          R/O/C         Valid                           Business Rules
                                       Entries
                          I    R       I    R             I                              R
        MPQ PSLQS         C                      Valid only when the
        Section                                  SEARCHTYP field
                                                 = P.

                                                 May repeat up to 5
                                                 times.
        MPR PSS                C                                           This field is present when the
        Section                                                            RESPONSE field = G and the
                                                                           POTSSPLITLOC field = O.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                               38 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:

        T H I      S       I   S         S P L         I    T T E R           N O        1




                                                 264
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



38b.   CABCONN – Cable Connection – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the Cable Connection.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

        USAGE:           This field is conditional.

         Transaction
            Type         R/O/C        Valid                         Business Rules
                                     Entries
                         I       R   I    R                I                           R
        MPQ              C                     Valid only when the
        CCLQS                                  SEARCHTYP field = C.
        Section
                                               May repeat up to 5
                                               times.
        MPR CCS                  C                                         This field is present when
        Section                                                            the RESPONSE field = G
                                                                           and the POTSSPLITLOC
                                                                           field = I.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          38 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:

        T H I      S         I   S     T H E           F   I   R S T         C O N N E C

        T   I O N




                                               265
                                                                               Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                     LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



38c.   LOPOTSSPLIT – Low POTS Splitter – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the Low POTS Splitter range.

              NOTE 1:          This field may be used on Inquires.

        USAGE:                This field is conditional.

            Transaction
               Type            R/O/C         Valid                       Business Rules
                                            Entries
                               I    R       I    R                           I                             R
        MPQ PSRQS              C                       Valid only when the SEARCHTYP field = S.
        Section
                                                       LOPOTSSPLIT & HIPOTSSPLIT must be in the
                                                       same format, either the old format (starting with
                                                       the CLEC’s ZCID) or the new format (starting
                                                       with VDA).

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                                24 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:

        0     1   2       -     0   1   6




                                                      266
                                                                               Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                     LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



38d.   HIPOTSSPLIT – High POTS Splitter – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the High POTS Splitter range.

              NOTE 1:          This field may be used on Inquires.

        USAGE:                This field is conditional.

            Transaction
               Type            R/O/C         Valid                       Business Rules
                                            Entries
                               I    R       I    R                           I                             R
        MPQ PSRQS              C                       Valid only when the SEARCHTYP field = S.
        Section
                                                       HIPOTSSPLIT & LOPOTSSPLIT must be in the
                                                       same format, either the old format (starting with
                                                       the CLEC’s ZCID) or the new format (starting
                                                       with VDA).

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                                24 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:

        0     2   4       -     0   2   6




                                                      267
                                                                            Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                  LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



38e.   LOCABCONN – Low Cable Connection – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the Low Cable Connection range.

            NOTE 1:         This field may be used on Inquires.

        USAGE:             This field is conditional.

         Transaction
            Type            R/O/C         Valid                        Business Rules
                                         Entries
                            I    R       I    R                           I                             R
        MPQ CCRQS           C                       Valid only when the SEARCHTYP field = R.
        Section
                                                    LOCABCONN & HICABCONN must be in the
                                                    same format, either the old format (starting with
                                                    the CLEC’s ZCID) or the new format (starting
                                                    with VDA).

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                             38 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:

       A 2     1   2   -    A 2      6




                                                   268
                                                                               Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                     LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



38f.   HICABCONN – High Cable Connection – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the High Cable Connection range.

              NOTE 1:          This field may be used on Inquires.

        USAGE:                This field is conditional.

            Transaction
               Type            R/O/C       Valid                         Business Rules
                                          Entries
                               I    R     I    R                           I                             R
        MPQ CCRQS              C                     Valid only when the SEARCHTYP field = R.
        Section
                                                     HICABCONN & LOCABCONN must be in the
                                                     same format, either the old format (starting with
                                                     the CLEC’s ZCID) or the new format (starting
                                                     with VDA).

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                               38 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:

        0     4   4   -   0     4   8




                                                    269
                                                                            Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                  LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



38g.   INVMSG – Inventory Message – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies additional information on the POTS splitter.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:           This field is conditional.

          Transaction          R/O/C                              Business Rules
             Type
                               I       R   I                              R
        MPR PSS                        C       Required if the INVSTAT field = Invalid.
        Section
                                               This field is present if the RESPONSE field = G and the
                                               POTSSPLITLOC field = O.
        MPR CCS                        C       Required if the INVSTAT field = Invalid.
        Section
                                               This field is present if the RESPONSE field = G and the
                                               POTSSPLITLOC field = I.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                             256 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:

        T H I      S       I       S       A       G O O D           S P L       I   T T E R




                                                  270
                                                       Effective October 25, 2010
                                             LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120




38g.   INVMSG – Inventory Message – Qwest-Specific Field (continued)




                                 271
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



39.   QR - Quantity Requested

      Identifies the quantity of telephone numbers or loops requested in this inquiry.

           NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires.

      VALID ENTRIES:

              1–9
              1 - 3 if requesting custom number where the EASNUM field = Y. – Qwest-Specific
              Entry
              1 - 5 if requesting consecutive number where the CBLOCK field = Y. – Qwest-
              Specific Entry
              1-9999 – Not currently used by Qwest

       USAGE:           This field is required.

              Transaction Type
                                            R/O/C          Valid Entries             Business Rules
                                            I R                I                R     I        R
       TNAQ TN Information Section          R         See VALID ENTRIES.

      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                         1 numeric character

      EXAMPLE:             3




                                             272
                                                                            Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                  LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



39a.   ASGNIND – Assignment Indicator – Qwest-Specific Field
       Indicates if the circuit is assigned or not.

             NOTE 1:        This field may be used on Inquires.

        USAGE:            This field is conditional.

          Transaction
             Type            R/O/C         Valid Entries                     Business Rules
                             I R               I            R                     I                 R
        RLDQ                 C         A = Assigned               Required if the
                                       U = Unassigned             TNADDRCKTIND field = A

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           1 alphanumeric character

        EXAMPLE:

        A




                                                273
                                                                       Effective October 25, 2010
                                                             LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



39b.    WTNQ – Working 10 Digit Telephone Number – Qwest-Specific Field –
Not currently used by Qwest
       Identifies the total count of WTNs received for the exact match address returned.




                                             274
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120




39c.   WTNNUM – Number of Working Telephone Numbers – Qwest-Specific
       Field
       Identifies the total number of TNs being queried.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires.

        USAGE:           This field is conditional.

         Transaction
            Type          R/O/C        Valid Entries                      Business Rules
                          I R               I        R                        I                   R
        RLDQ              C         Less than or            Required if the TNADDRCKTIND
                                    equal to                field = T
                                    WTNQ
                                                            WTNNUM and WTN repeat as a
                                                            group up to 24 times.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          2 numeric characters

        EXAMPLE:

        0    3




                                              275
                                                                    Effective October 25, 2010
                                                          LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



39d.    ECCKTQ – ECCKT Quantity – Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently
used by Qwest
       Identifies the number of ECCKT/rows in the Response.




                                          276
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



39e.   ECCKTNUM – Index of ECCKT/rows in Response – Qwest-Specific
       Field
       Identifies the total number of ECCKTs being returned.

            NOTE 1:      This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:          This field is conditional.

            Transaction Type
                                    R/O/C         Valid Entries             Business Rules
                                    I R       I          R          I                R
        RLDR                           R                                May repeat as a group.
        LQR Circuit                    C                                May repeat as a group.
        Information and
        Counters Section

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                         2 numeric characters

        EXAMPLE:

        0    3




                                             277
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



39f.   WTNSTAT – WTN Status – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the status of the WTN received for the Exact Match.

              NOTE 1:      This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:            This field is conditional.

            Transaction
               Type          R/O/C           Valid Entries                     Business Rules
                             I R        I             R             I                 R
        AVR WTN                 C             WORKING                  Required when the section is
        Section                               PEND-OUT                 present.
                                               (pending
                                               disconnect               WTN, WTNSTAT, and LNAME
                                               order)                   may repeat as a group.
                                              SUSPEND
                                               (temporary 2-
                                               way suspension
                                               of working
                                               service) PND-
                                               IN (pending in
                                               order)


       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           8 alphanumeric characters

        EXAMPLE:

        O     P   E   N




                                               278
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



39g.   WCCLLI – Wire Center CLLI – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the CLLI Code of the Wire Center.

              NOTE 1:      This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:            This field is optional.

            Transaction
               Type         R/O/C         Valid                      Business Rules
                                        Entries
                            I    R      I     R                          I                       R
        RLDR                     O                   Repeats the same number of times as the
                                                     value in the ECCKTQ field.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                         8 alphanumeric characters

        EXAMPLE:

        B     L   D   R    C    O    M A




                                               279
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



39h.   MLTDIST – MLT Distance – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the mechanized loop test distance.

              NOTE 1:      This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:            This field is optional.

            Transaction
               Type         R/O/C         Valid                       Business Rules
                                        Entries
                               I   R    I     R                          I                        R
        RLDR                       O                 Repeats the same number of times as the
                                                     value in the ECCKTQ field.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           10 numeric characters

        EXAMPLE:

        3     4   7   6    6




                                               280
                                                             Effective October 25, 2010
                                                   LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



39i.     SEGMENTQTY – Segment Quantity – Qwest-Specific Field – Not
currently used by Qwest
       Identifies the total number of segments.




                                             281
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



39j.   SEGMENTNUM – Segment Number – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the actual segment number.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:          This field is conditional.

         Transaction
            Type         R/O/C        Valid Entries                     Business Rules
                         I R      I          R           I                       R
        RLDR                 C         1-99                  Populated if returned.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          2 alphanumeric characters

        EXAMPLE:

        0    2




                                               282
                                                                           Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                 LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



39k.   TERMINAL ID – Terminal ID – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the terminal.

             NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:            This field is optional.

         Transaction
            Type          R/O/C         Valid                        Business Rules
                                       Entries
                           I       R   I    R                               I                      R
        RLDR                       O

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                            50 alphanumeric characters

        EXAMPLE:

        T   H    I   S         I   S     T   E      R   M   I   N   A   L       1




                                                 283
                                                                            Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                  LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



39l.   BRIDGE_TAP_OFFSET_DESC – Bridged Tap Offset Description –
       Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies information about Bridge Taps.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:          This field is optional.

         Transaction
            Type         R/O/C            Valid                       Business Rules
                                         Entries
                         I       R       I    R                            I                        R
        RLDR                     O

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                             150 alphanumeric characters

        EXAMPLE:

        T   H I     S        I       S      A N          A N A L        O G            B R   I   D G E

        T   A P




                                                   284
                                                                             Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                   LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



39m.   MAKE_UP_DESC – Make Up Description – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies data about loop makeup.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:          This field is optional.

         Transaction
            Type         R/O/C            Valid                        Business Rules
                                         Entries
                         I       R       I    R                             I                              R
        RLDR                     O

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                             400 alphanumeric characters

        EXAMPLE:

        T   H I     S        I       S        A N         A N A L         O G          B R    I   D G E

        T   A P




                    NOTE 1:              In order to conserve space, only 200 spaces are provided above.
                                         The actual field length is 400 characters.




                                                   285
                                                                             Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                   LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



39n.     CABLE_NAME – Cable Name – Qwest-Specific Field
         Identifies the cable identifier being queried.

               NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

          USAGE:            This field is optional.

 Transaction   R/O/
    Type       C                                Valid Entries                              Business Rules
               I R     I                                R                                        I           R
RLDR             O         Valid Cable Name Prefixes                                   If CABLE_NAME
                           BB = Broadband Network Unit VDSL Fiber to the Curb          is FTH, you cannot
                           CH = Carrier Hub                                            resell data services.
                           CMP = Campus Wire Environment
                           DSL = Digital Subscriber Line, ADSL
                           DSLB = Next Level Digital Subscriber Line, ADSL
                                    NLC Broadband Network Unit ADSL Fiber to
                                    the Curb
                           EX = Remote Switch Unit / Optical Remote Module
                           FCP = Field Connection Point
                           FH = Fiber Hub
                           FTH = Fiber to the Premises
                           IPG = Integrated Digital Loop Carrier
                           IPGXB = Cross wire center boundary IDLC
                           L = Fiber
                           LH = Fiber Hub
                           LPGB = VDSL-equipped USAM (universal service
                                    access multiplexer)
                                    VDSL-equipped BSAM (broadband services
                                    access multiplexer)
                           MTE = Multi-tenant Environment
                           PG = Pair Gain
                           PGBR#a = BR1/10 ISDN single-system channel bank or
                                        side A of a dual-system channel bank
                           PGBR#b = Side B of a dual system channel bank
                           PGL = Next Level DLC Applications
                           PWR = Power Cable
                           RMU = Remote Measurement Unit
                           T = Interoffice Cable
                           UDC = Universal Digital Carrier
                           UDF = Unbundled Dark Fiber

         DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                            10 alphanumeric characters

          EXAMPLE:

          T    1       D    E    N   V    E    R




                                                   286
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



39o.   PAIR_GAIN_TYPE – Pair Gain Type – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the type of pair gain, if present.

             NOTE 1:        This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:             This field is optional.

         Transaction
            Type           R/O/C       Valid                        Business Rules
                                      Entries
                            I   R     I    R                             I                        R
        RLDR                    O

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           9 alphanumeric characters

        EXAMPLE:

        S    L   C     9   6




                                                287
                                                                       Effective October 25, 2010
                                                             LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



39p.   PAIR_NUMBER – Pair Number – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the unique number of pair being queried.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:           This field is optional.

         Transaction
            Type         R/O/C       Valid                        Business Rules
                                    Entries
                          I   R     I    R                            I                        R
        RLDR                  O

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                        4 numeric characters

        EXAMPLE:

        1   2    0   4




                                              288
                                                                      Effective October 25, 2010
                                                            LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



39q.   LOADPTAMT – Load Points Amount – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the Load Points amount.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:          This field is optional.

         Transaction
            Type         R/O/C      Valid                        Business Rules
                                   Entries
                         I    R    I    R                            I                        R
        RLDR                  O

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                       2 numeric characters

        EXAMPLE:

        0   2




                                             289
                                                                           Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                 LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120




40.   TNTYPE - Telephone Number Type

      Indicates the type of telephone number requested in this inquiry.

           NOTE 1:         This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

      VALID ENTRIES:

              D     =   Specific number(s) – Not currently used by Qwest
              N     =   Random number – Qwest-Specific Entry
              S     =   Sequential numbers – Not currently used by Qwest
              R     =   Range of numbers – Not currently used by Qwest

       USAGE:             This field is required.

                  Transaction Type
                                                    R/O/C         Valid Entries           Business
                                                                                           Rules
                                                    I   R           I              R     I       R
       TNAQ TN Information Section                  R       See VALID
                                                            ENTRIES.
       TNAR Availability Response                       R
       Section

      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                             1 alphanumeric character

      EXAMPLE:              N




                                               290
                                                                     Effective October 25, 2010
                                                           LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



41.   REQNUM - Requested Number
      Indicates the NPA/NXX, telephone number(s) or range of telephone numbers requested.

         NOTE 1:        This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

        NOTE 1:        The first six digits (NPA/NXX) are always populated. – Not currently used
                       by Qwest

        NOTE 2:        “W” is the only valid alpha character and is used to indicate a wild card
                       entry. “W” indicates that any number can be provided in that position. –
                       Not currently used by Qwest

        NOTE 3:        When requesting a specific NPA/NXX the population of wild cards is not
                       necessary. – Not currently used by Qwest

        NOTE 4:        This field may be used for the following inquiries: telephone number
                       assignment and appointment scheduling. – Not currently used by Qwest

        NOTE 5:        Multiple iterations of this field may be provided as needed on telephone
                       number assignment and appointment scheduling inquiries. – Not currently
                       used by Qwest

       USAGE:          This field is conditional.

        Transaction Type
                              R/O/C       Valid                    Business Rules
                                         Entries
                              I    R       I    R   I                         R
       AAQ – WTN              R         1-               If a dispatch is required, the REQNUM
       Section                          999             field is the total number of lines requiring
                                                        an appointment.

                                                        If the LSR will add new service at an
                                                        address, the REQNUM should be the
                                                        Total Number of Lines to be installed less
                                                        the WLINUM.

                                                        If the LSR will add new lines to existing
                                                        service, the REQNUM should be the total
                                                        number of lines to be installed.

                                                        If TXTYP = D or U, REQNUM must not
                                                        exceed 99.

                                                        If TXTYP = U, REQNUM is the Quantity
                                                        of NC Codes.




                                            291
                                                                       Effective October 25, 2010
                                                             LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120


41.   REQNUM – Inventory Message – Qwest-Specific Field (continued)

           Transaction Type
                                  R/O/C     Valid Entries                  Business Rules
                                  I R           I        R              I                        R
          ASQ –                   C       1-999              If TXTYP = D or U,
          Appointment                                        REQNUM must not be
          Selection Section                                  populated.

                                                             If TXTYP = C,
                                                             REQNUM must be
                                                             populated.

                                                             For Information Only:
                                                             If TXTYP = C and the
                                                             request is for a new
                                                             date from the AAR
                                                             Calendar response,
                                                             REQNUM should
                                                             equal the preceding
                                                             AAQ REQNUM.

                                                             If TXTYP = C and the
                                                             request is for a change
                                                             of # of lines,
                                                             REQNUM should
                                                             equal the revised total
                                                             # of lines.
          TNAR Availability          C                                                 Required if the
          Response Section                                                             NPANXX field is
                                                                                       populated on the
                                                                                       query.

                                                                                       If TNs are not
                                                                                       available for the
                                                                                       preferred prefix, an
                                                                                       error message is
                                                                                       returned and no
                                                                                       alternative TNs are
                                                                                       provided.

         DATA CHARACTERISTICS:
         For Transaction Type of AAQ and ASQ: 3 numeric characters
         For Transaction Type of TNAR: 6 numeric characters

         EXAMPLE:             0       0        2




                                             292
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



41a.   JACKNUM - Jack Number – Qwest-Specific Field
       Indicates the number of jacks required.

              NOTE 1:     This field may be used on Inquires.

        USAGE:           This field is conditional.

            Transaction Type
                                 R/O/C         Valid Entries            Business Rules
                                 I R               I         R              I          R
        AAQ – WTN Section        C          1-99                     If TXTYP = C,
                                                                     JACKNUM
                                                                     must not be
                                                                     populated.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          2 numeric characters

       EXAMPLE:
        1    2




                                              293
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



41b.   USOCNUM – Number of other USOCs – Qwest-Specific Field
       Indicates the number of other USOCs on this request.

        USAGE:          Populated by Qwest.

            Transaction Type
                                R/O/C             Valid Entries           Business Rules
                                I R                   I              R     I        R
        AAQ – WTN Section       N         0-99

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                       2 numeric characters

       EXAMPLE:
        1    2




                                            294
                                                                           Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                 LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



41c.   OTHERUSOCS – Other USOCs – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies if Network Service USOCs are required.

              NOTE 1:      This field may be used on Inquires.

        USAGE:            This field is conditional.

            Transaction
               Type         R/O/C            Valid Entries                   Business Rules
                            I R                I           R                     I                 R
        AAQ – WTN           C         USOC such as                  If TXTYP = C or U,
        Section                       RWW – move a                  OTHERUSOCS must not be
                                      NID or drop                   populated.
                                      NW1 Eastern
                                      NW2                           This field may repeat.
                                      (Central/Western)
                                      all others outside
                                      work to dispatch
                                      tech.
                                      93G2X bury drop
                                      or new aerial
                                      drop.
                                      VT6NC – meet
                                      me

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           5 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:
        9    3 G 2 X




                                               295
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



41d.    NUMSLOTS – Number of Slots – Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently
used by Qwest
       Identifies the number of available appointment slots returned in the response.




                                             296
                                                                           Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                 LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



41e.   AVAILIND – Appointment Availability Indicator – Qwest-Specific Field
       Indicates if an appointment is available.

             NOTE 1:      This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:           This field is conditional.

          Transaction Type
                                  R/O/C         Valid Entries                Business Rules
                                  I R       I          R           I                  R
        AAR – Appointment             C          Y = Available         Populated only if the
        Availability Section                                           RESPONSE field = G.

                                                                       This field repeats the same
                                                                       number of times as the value in
                                                                       the NUMSLOTS field.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          1 alphanumeric character

        EXAMPLE:              Y




                                                297
                                                                             Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                   LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



41f.   APPSLOT – Appointment Slot – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the date and time available for the appointment.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

        VALID ENTRIES:

                  If TXTYP = C, then the format is “CCYYMMDD”
                  If TXTYP = D, then the format is "CCYYMMDD, HHMM-HHMM”
                  If TXTYP = U, then the format is "CCYYMMDD, HHMM”

        USAGE:           This field is conditional.

          Transaction Type
                                  R/O/C           Valid Entries                 Business Rules
                                  I R         I          R            I                  R
        AAR – Appointment             C            See VALID              Populated only if the
        Availability Section                       ENTRIES.               RESPONSE field = G.

                                                                          Appointment Slot: Date and time
                                                                          available for appointment
                                                                          (TXTYP = D or U).
                                                                          Date available for appointment
                                                                          (TXTYP = C), includes slot
                                                                          within a calendar.

                                                                          This field repeats the same
                                                                          number of times as the value in
                                                                          the NUMSLOTS field.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                              19 alphanumeric character

        EXAMPLE:             2   0   0    1       0   9   2   4   1   0   1   5   -   0   2   1   5




                                                  298
                                                                                Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                      LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



41g.   COMPDATE – Completion Date – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the reserved completion date for the appointment.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:           This field is conditional.

         Transaction Type
                                  R/O/C            Valid Entries                    Business Rules
                                  I R          I          R               I                  R
        AAR –                         C             CCYYMMDD                  Populated only if the
        Appointment                                                           RESPONSE field = G and if an
        Confirmation                                                          open slot was available and was
        Section                                                               reserved in Appointment
                                                                              Scheduler.
        ASR –                          O               CCYYMMDD               Populated only if the
        Appointment                                                           RESPONSE field = G.
        Confirmation
        Section

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                                 8 alphanumeric characters

        EXAMPLE:              2    0       0       1    0    9   2    8




                                                       299
                                                                       Effective October 25, 2010
                                                             LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120


41h.   COMPTIME – Completion Time – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the reserved completion date for the appointment.
             NOTE 1:        This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.
        USAGE:           This field is conditional.
         Transaction       R/
            Type           O/         Valid Entries                        Business Rules
                           C
                          I R         I             R                 I                      R
        AAR –                 C                   HHMM                             Populated if the
        Appointment                                                                RESPONSE field =
        Confirmation                                                               G and if an open slot
        Section                                                                    was available and
                                                                                   was reserved in
                                                                                   Appointment
                                                                                   Scheduler.

                                                                                   If TXTYP = C,
                                                                                   COMPTIME must
                                                                                   not be populated.
        ASQ –             C       HHMM                      Required for
        Appointment                                         commitments,
        Selection                                           otherwise optional.
        Section
                                                            Time zone is always
                                                            that of the dispatch
                                                            address.

                                                            If TXTYP = C,
                                                            COMPTIME must
                                                            not be populated.
        ASR –                 C                   HHMM                             Value returned by
        Appointment                                                                Appointment
        Confirmation                                                               Scheduler
        Section
                                                                                   If TXTYP = C,
                                                                                   COMPTIME must
                                                                                   not be populated.

                                                                                   This field will be
                                                                                   populated if the
                                                                                   Response field = G.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:
       For the Transaction Type of AAR and ASR: 4 alphanumeric characters
       For the Transaction Type of ASQ: 4 numeric characters

        EXAMPLE:              1   0       0   0




                                                  300
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



41i.   ABTIME – After – Before Time – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the reserved time set for the work to be performed.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

        USAGE:           This field is conditional.

          Transaction
             Type          R/O/C            Valid Entries                    Business Rules
                           I R             I            R                I                  R
        AAR –                  C                   If TXTYP                         Value returned
        Appointment                                = D, then                        by Appointment
        Confirmation                               the format                       Scheduler.
        Section                                    is HHMM-                         Populated if the
                                                   HHMM.                            RESPONSE field
                                                                                    = G and if an
                                                      If TXTYP                      open slot was
                                                      = U, then                     available and was
                                                      the format                    reserved in
                                                      is HHMM.                      Appointment
                                                                                    Scheduler.

                                                                                    If TXTYP = C,
                                                                                    ABTIME must
                                                                                    not be populated
        ASQ                C         If TXTYP                      Required for
        Appointment                  = D, the                      appointments.
        Selection                    format is
        Section                      HHMM-                         If TXTYP =
                                     HHMM.                         C, ABTIME
                                                                   must not be
                                     If TXTYP                      populated.
                                     = U, the
                                     format is
                                     HHMM.




                                              301
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120


41i.   ABTIME – After – Before Time – Qwest-Specific Field (continued)

            Transaction
               Type       R/O/C            Valid Entries                    Business Rules
                          I R             I            R                I                  R
           ASR –              C                   If TXTYP                         Value returned
           Appointment                            = D, the                         by Appointment
           Selection                              format is                        Scheduler
           Section                                HHMM-
                                                  HHMM.                            If TXTYP = C,
                                                                                   ABTIME must
                                                     If TXTYP                      not be populated.
                                                     = U, the
                                                     format is                     Populated only if
                                                     HHMM.                         the RESPONSE
                                                                                   field = G.

          DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                      9 alphanumeric characters

           EXAMPLE:        1      0   0    0     -    1   1   0   0




                                               302
                                                                             Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                   LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



41j.   INQRES NBR – Inquiry Response Number – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the number of the Inquiry response.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

        USAGE:           This field is conditional.

         Transaction Type
                                  R/O/C        Valid                      Business Rules
                                              Entries
                                  I       R   I    R           I                          R
        ASR –                             O                               This field will be populated if
        Appointment                                                       the Response field = G, and if
        Confirmation                                                      an open slot was reserved in
        Section                                                           Appointment Scheduler.
        AAR –                             C                               This field will be populated if
        Appointment                                                       the Response field = G, and if
        Availability                                                      an open slot was reserved in
        Response                                                          Appointment Scheduler.
        CTQ                       C                     Required
        Confirmation                                    when the
        Number Selection                                TXTYP field
                                                        = D.

                                                        If the
                                                        appointment
                                                        is canceled
                                                        after the order
                                                        was issued,
                                                        then the order
                                                        shall be
                                                        SUPPed.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                            10 alphanumeric characters

        EXAMPLE:              2       2




                                                 303
                                                                      Effective October 25, 2010
                                                            LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



42.   HUNT – Hunt – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies that the telephone number(s) being requested will be used in a hunting arrangement.




                                            304
                                                                                     Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                           LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



43.        TNRES - Telephone Number Response

           Identifies the telephone number in response to the customer's inquiry.

                NOTE 1:           This field may be used on Responses.

            USAGE:               This field is conditional.

        Transaction
           Type              R/O/C             Valid Entries                          Business Rules
                             I R              I            R                      I                     R
      TNAR TN                    C                    Dashes are                               Returned only if
      Response Section                                required in                              the RESPONSE
                                                      character                                field = G or M.
                                                      positions 4
                                                      and 8.
      CTQ Telephone          C          Dashes are                        Required when
      Number Section                    required in                       the TXTYP field
                                        character                         = B.
                                        positions 4
                                        and 8.                            TNs can be
                                                                          canceled only
                                                                          before an order
                                                                          is issued and not
                                                                          after.

           DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                                  12 alphanumeric characters

           EXAMPLE:
            3   0   3    -   9     6   5   -   1   2   1      2




                                                       305
                                                                      Effective October 25, 2010
                                                            LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



44.   HNTRES – Hunt Group Restriction – Not currently used by Qwest
      Indicates the number(s) requested may not be available for hunting due to technical
      restrictions.




                                            306
                                                                      Effective October 25, 2010
                                                            LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



45.   LSO - Local Service Office
      Identifies the NPA/NXX of the local or alternate serving central office of the customer
      location or primary location of the end user.

           NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

       USAGE:           This field is conditional.




                                             307
                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Transaction Type
                    R/O/C         Valid Entries                       Business Rules
                    I R            I            R                 I                       R
AVR – Switch            C                    NPA                                  This field is
Section                                      NXX of                               necessary for
                                             Wire                                 use in Service
                                             Center                               Availability
                                                                                  Query.
FAQ – Telephone     C       Leading NPA               Required if the SCATEG
Number Address              NXX of the                field = U and the
Circuit Indicator           Central Office;           TNADDRCKTIND field
Section                     returned in the           = C.
                            AVR.                      Not required if SCATEG
                                                      = D or H.
                            NPA NXX of                Required if the SCATEG
                            the switch.               field = P or I.

                                                      Fields AFT, SAPR,
                                                      SANO, SASF, SASD,
                                                      SASN, SATH, SASS,
                                                      LD1, LV1, LD2, LV2,
                                                      LD3, LV3, AHN,
                                                      ROUTE, BOX, CITY,
                                                      STATE, ZIP, CALA
                                                      repeat as a group for
                                                      SCATEG = H or D.
                                                      If SCATEG = H or D,
                                                      then the Telephone
                                                      Number Address Circuit
                                                      Indicator Section is
                                                      required and may repeat
                                                      up to 2 times.
                                                      Fields AFT, SAPR,
                                                      SANO, SASF, SASD,
                                                      SASN, SATH, SASS,
                                                      LD1, LV1, LD2, LV2,
                                                      LD3, LV3, AHN,
                                                      ROUTE, BOX, CITY,
                                                      STATE, ZIP, CALA, LSO
                                                      are a group if SCATEG =
                                                      P, U or I.
                                                      If SCATEG = P, U, or I,
                                                      then this section is
                                                      required.
MPQ –               R       NPA NXX of
Administrative              the end user’s
Section                     LSO that
                            contains
                            facilities to be
                            validated.




                                308
                                                               Effective October 25, 2010
                                                     LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



45.    LSO - Local Service Office (continued)


       Transaction Type
                           R/O/C                 Valid Entries                 Business
                                                                                 Rules
                           I   R                     I                     R   I     R
      MPR                      R
      Administrative
      Section
      SAQ Switch           R       When INFOTYPE = S, the NPA/NXX
      Section                      can be any one of the NPA/NXXs listed
                                   on the switch.

                                   When INFOTYPE = M, the NPA/NXX
                                   should be the primary NPA/NXX of the
                                   LSO.
      SAR Switch Section       R
      SAR Multi-Switch         R
      Section

      DATA CHARACTERISTICS: 6 numeric characters

      EXAMPLE:         3   0   3   9    6    5




                                       309
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120




46.   NPA/NXX - NPA/NXX

      Identifies a specific NPA/NXX within the local serving office.

           NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

       USAGE:           This field is conditional.

         Transaction Type
                                R/O/C          Valid Entries               Business Rules
                                I R        I          R         I                    R
       SAR Multi-Switch            O            NPA NXX             Required if RESPONSE = G and
       Section                                                      INFOTYPE = M.
       LQR Circuit                   C          NPA NXX             Populated if returned.
       Information and
       Counters Section                                             May repeat as a group.

      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          6 numeric characters

      EXAMPLE:            3     0    3     9     6    5




                                               310
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



46a.   NPA – Preferred NPA – Qwest-Specific Field

       Identifies when a TN from a specific NPA is requested.

            NOTE 1:      This field may be used on Inquires.

        USAGE:          This field is conditional.

         Transaction Type
                               R/O/C       Valid Entries                    Business Rules
                               I R             I         R                        I                  R
        TNAQ TN                C         NPA                     This field will be disregarded if
        Information                                              the NTNUM field is populated.
        Section
                                                                 Required when the NXX field
                                                                 is populated.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                         3 numeric characters

       EXAMPLE:            3    0    3




                                             311
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



46b.   NXX – Preferred NXX – Qwest-Specific Field

       Identifies when a TN from a specific NXX is requested.

            NOTE 1:      This field may be used on Inquires.

        USAGE:          This field is conditional.

          Transaction
             Type           R/O/C      Valid Entries                      Business Rules
                            I R            I         R                         I                    R
        TNAQ TN             C         NXX                   This field will be disregarded if the
        Information                                         NTNUM field is populated or the
        Section                                             EWORD field is populated with a 5-
                                                            7 character word.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                         3 numeric characters

       EXAMPLE:            9    6    5




                                             312
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



46c.   NTNUM – Nearby Telephone Number – Qwest-Specific Field

       Identifies a Query for TNs that are nearby another TN.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires.

        USAGE:          This field is conditional.

         Transaction Type
                               R/O/C         Valid Entries                   Business Rules
                               I R               I         R                       I              R
        TNAQ TN                C         Any telephone            Prohibited if the ECATEG,
        Information                      number in xxx-           EWORD or CBLOCK fields are
        Section                          xxx-xxxx                 populated.
                                         format (dashes
                                         are required in
                                         character
                                         positions 4 and
                                         8).

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                         12 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:            3    0    3     -    9     6   5      -   1    2    1   2




                                               313
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



46d.   CBLOCK – Consecutive Block – Qwest-Specific Field

       Identifies a request for a consecutive block of TNs.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires.

        USAGE:           This field is conditional.

         Transaction Type
                                R/O/C      Valid Entries                    Business Rules
                                I R            I         R                        I               R
        TNAQ TN                 C        Y = Yes                 Prohibited if the EASNUM field
        Information                      Blank                   = Y or the NTNUM field is
        Section                                                  populated.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          1 alpha character

       EXAMPLE:             Y




                                              314
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



46e.   EASNUM – Easy Numbers – Qwest-Specific Field

       Identifies a request for a custom, good or vanity number.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires.

        USAGE:           This field is conditional.

         Transaction Type
                               R/O/C         Valid Entries                    Business Rules
                               I R               I         R                       I              R
        TNAQ TN                C          Y = Yes                  This field must = Y if the
        Information                       Blank                    ECATEG or EWORD fields are
        Section                                                    populated.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          1 alpha character

       EXAMPLE:            Y




                                              315
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



46f.   ECATEG – Easy Number Category – Qwest-Specific Field

       Identifies the category of numbers to be searched.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires.

        VALID ENTRIES:

                  1-10
                  1 = Any 3 same (XYXX)
                  2 = Brackets (XYYX)
                  3 = 2 Repeated (XYXY)
                  4 = First 3 Same (XXXY)
                  5 = Hundreds (XX00)
                  6 = 2 Pair (XXYY)
                  7 = Last 3 Same (XYYY)
                  8 = Ladders (WXYZ,ZYXW)
                  9 = 4 of a Kind (XXXX)
                  10 = Thousands (X000)

        USAGE:           This field is conditional.

         Transaction Type
                                R/O/C       Valid Entries                    Business Rules
                                I R             I         R                      I                R
        TNAQ TN                 C         See VALID               Required when the EASNUM
        Information                       ENTRIES.                field = Y.
        Section
                                                                  Prohibited if the NTNUM,
                                                                  EWORD or CBLOCK fields are
                                                                  populated.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          2 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:             1




                                              316
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



46g.   EWORD – Easy Word to Find – Qwest-Specific Field

       Identifies an option that allows the selection of TNs that consist of letters and numbers that
       make up a word.

             NOTE 1:      This field may be used on Inquires.

        USAGE:           This field is conditional.

         Transaction Type
                                R/O/C        Valid Entries                   Business Rules
                                I R              I         R                     I                      R
        TNAQ TN                 C         Words: 0-7              Required when the EASNUM
        Information                       characters (A-          field = Y.
        Section                           Y, excluding
                                          Q)                      Prohibited if the NTNUM,
                                          Numbers 0-9             ECATEG or CBLOCK fields
                                                                  are populated.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          7 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:             C    L    E     C    0     1




                                                317
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



46h.   EJUST – Easy Word Justification – Qwest-Specific Field

       Identifies whether the entry in the EWORD field should be left or right justified.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires.

        USAGE:           This field is conditional.

         Transaction Type
                                R/O/C        Valid Entries                   Business Rules
                                I R              I         R                       I              R
        TNAQ TN                 C         R = Right               Required when the EWORD
        Information                       L = Left                field is populated, otherwise
        Section                                                   ignored.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          1 alpha characters

       EXAMPLE:             L




                                              318
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



46i.   CUSTOMIND – Custom Indicator – Qwest-Specific Field

       Identifies if the TN being returned is a custom TN.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:           This field is conditional.

          Transaction Type
                                 R/O/C          Valid Entries                Business Rules
                                 I R        I          R             I               R
        TNAR TN Response             C          Y = Yes
        Section                                 Blank

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          1 alpha character

       EXAMPLE:            Y




                                                319
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



47.   ALTLSO – Alternate LSO – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies an alternative LSO where the feature/service is available.




                                             320
                                                            Effective October 25, 2010
                                                  LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



47a.    FEATNUM – Number of Features – Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently
used by Qwest
       Identifies the number of features.




                                            321
                                                                           Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                 LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



47b.   USOC – USOC – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the USOC being ordered.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:           This field is conditional.

          Transaction
             Type          R/O/C          Valid Entries                    Business Rules
                           I R        I          R           I                      R
        SAR USOC              C           USOC                     Required if the RESPONSE field =
        Section                                                    G and the INFOTYPE field = S.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          5 alphanumeric characters

        EXAMPLE:

        T    5   F   C    5




                                              322
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



47c.   USOCMOD – USOC Modifier – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies data that modifies the USOC.

              NOTE 1:      This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:            This field is optional.

            Transaction
               Type         R/O/C          Valid Entries                  Business Rules
                            I R        I          R         I                      R
        SAR USOC               O           USOC Modifier          Required if the RESPONSE field =
        Section                                                   G and the INFOTYPE field = S.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                         5 alphanumeric characters

        EXAMPLE:

        0     C   F   B




                                               323
                                                                           Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                 LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



47d.   SUPPORTED – Switch Support – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies whether the USOC is supported by the switch.

              NOTE 1:      This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:            This field is optional.

            Transaction
               Type         R/O/C          Valid Entries                   Business Rules
                            I R        I          R          I                      R
        SAR USOC               O           U = Unknown             Required if the RESPONSE field =
        Section                            Y = Yes                 G and the INFOTYPE field = S.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                         1 alpha character

        EXAMPLE:

        U




                                               324
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



47e.   RRATE – Recurring Retail Rate – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the monthly contract rate for the USOC.

              NOTE 1:      This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:            This field is optional.

            Transaction
               Type            R/O/C       Valid Entries                  Business Rules
                               I R     I          R         I                     R
        SAR USOC                  O         -$9999.99 to         Required if the RESPONSE field = G
        Section                             $9999.99             and the INFOTYPE field = S.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                         9 alphanumeric characters

        EXAMPLE:

        $     2   4   .    9     9




                                               325
                                                                              Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                    LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



47f.   NRATE – Non-Recurring Retail Rate – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies a one-time only contracted rate for the USOC.

              NOTE 1:      This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:            This field is optional.

            Transaction
               Type            R/O/C           Valid Entries                  Business Rules
                               I R         I          R         I                     R
        SAR USOC                  O             -$9999.99 to         Required if the RESPONSE field = G
        Section                                 $9999.99             and the INFOTYPE field = S.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                             9 alphanumeric characters

        EXAMPLE:

        $     2   4   4    9     .     5       5




                                                   326
                                                                       Effective October 25, 2010
                                                             LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



47g.   USOCDESC – USOC Title – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the English Description of the USOC.

            NOTE 1:      This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:          This field is optional.

          Transaction
             Type           R/O/C       Valid Entries                  Business Rules
                            I R        I       R         I                     R
        SAR USOC               O          USOC               Required if the RESPONSE field = G
        Section                           English            and the INFOTYPE field = S.
                                          Description

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                       150 alphanumeric characters

        EXAMPLE:

        C A L L            F O R W A R D I               N G




                                             327
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



47h.   RDISC – Recurring Discount Percentage – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the monthly discount according to contract.

              NOTE 1:      This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:            This field is optional.

            Transaction
               Type          R/O/C         Valid Entries                  Business Rules
                             I R       I          R         I                     R
        SAR USOC                O           0.0% to              Required if the RESPONSE field = G
        Section                             100.00%              and the INFOTYPE field = S.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                         7 alphanumeric characters

        EXAMPLE:

        1     5   %




                                               328
                                                                             Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                   LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



47i.   NDISC – Non-Recurring Discount Percentage – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies a one-time discount according to contract.

              NOTE 1:      This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:            This field is optional.

            Transaction
               Type          R/O/C         Valid Entries                     Business Rules
                             I R       I          R            I                     R
        SAR USOC                O           0.0% to                 Required if the RESPONSE field = G
        Section                             100.00%                 and the INFOTYPE field = S.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                         7 alphanumeric characters

        EXAMPLE:

        1     5   %




                                               329
                                                                       Effective October 25, 2010
                                                             LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



47j.    CARRNUM – Number of Carriers – Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently
used by Qwest
       Identifies the number of carriers for this circuit.




                                                330
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



47k.   CIC – Carrier ID – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the RSID.

             NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:            This field is optional.

            Transaction
               Type           R/O/C        Valid                     Business Rules
                                         Entries
                              I    R     I     R     I                       R
        SAR Carrier                O                     Required if the RESPONSE field = G and
        Section                                          the INFOTYPE field = S.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                         4 alphanumeric characters

        EXAMPLE:

        0    2   8    8




                                               331
                                                                            Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                  LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



47l.   CARRNAME – Carrier Name – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the CLEC name.

             NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:            This field is optional.

            Transaction
               Type            R/O/C             Valid                   Business Rules
                                               Entries
                               I       R       I     R   I                       R
        SAR Carrier                    O                     Required if the RESPONSE field = G and
        Section                                              the INFOTYPE field = S.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                             30 alphanumeric characters

        EXAMPLE:

        W     O   R   L    D       C       O   M




                                                   332
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



47m.   LATACODE – Local Access Transport Area Code – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the Local Access Transport Area Code

              NOTE 1:      This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:            This field is optional.

            Transaction
               Type         R/O/C          Valid Entries                 Business Rules
                            I R        I           R        I                     R
        SAR Carrier            O           0 = IntraLATA         Required if the RESPONSE field =
        Section                            1 = InterLATA         G and the INFOTYPE field = S.
                                           2 = Intra &
                                           InterLATA

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                         1 alphanumeric character

        EXAMPLE:

        1




                                               333
                                                            Effective October 25, 2010
                                                  LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



47n.     SWITCHNUM – Number of Switches – Qwest-Specific Field – Not
currently used by Qwest
       Identifies the number of switches.




                                            334
                                                                    Effective October 25, 2010
                                                          LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



47o.     NPANXXNUM – Number of NPA/NXXs – Qwest-Specific Field – Not
currently used by Qwest
       Identifies the number of NPA/NXXs for each switch type.




                                           335
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



47p.   SWTYPE – Switch Type – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the type of switch used.

             NOTE 1:        This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:           This field is optional.

         Transaction Type
                                 R/O/C         Valid                    Business Rules
                                             Entries
                                 I   R       I     R     I                      R
        SAR Multi-Switch             O                       Required if the RESPONSE field = G and
        Section                                              the INFOTYPE field = M.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           8 alphanumeric characters

        EXAMPLE:

        1     E    S    S




                                               336
                                                                           Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                 LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120




48.   FETAVA - Feature Availability
      Identifies the feature/service being requested.

            NOTE 1:        This field may be used on Inquires.

       USAGE:             This field is optional.

        Transaction Type
                                 R/O/C              Valid Entries          Business Rules
                                 I R                    I              R    I        R
       SAQ Switch Section        O          1 to 5 characters
                                            Asterisk (*)

      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          5 alphanumeric characters

      EXAMPLE:
       C F B 0        0




                                               337
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



49.   FRESP – Feature/Service Response – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies the status of the feature/service requested by the customer.




                                             338
                                                                Effective October 25, 2010
                                                      LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



49a.     TNCOUNT – Telephone Number Count – Qwest-Specific Field – Not
currently used by Qwest
       Identifies the number of TNs being returned.




                                            339
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



49b.   SNR – Selected Numbers Returned – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the number of TNs being returned to Qwest.

        USAGE:          Populated by Qwest.

        Transaction Type
                             R/O/C          Valid Entries                   Business Rules
                             I R                I               R               I                R
        TNSQ Selected        N        0-9                           .
        TNs Section                   Value = 0 means all
                                      TNs are returned.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                      1 numeric characters

        EXAMPLE:

           3




                                            340
                                                                             Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                   LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



49c.   SELNUM – CLEC Selected Telephone Number Count – Qwest-Specific
       Field
       Identifies the CLEC selected telephone number count.

            NOTE 1:        This field may be used on Inquires.

        USAGE:            This field is conditional.

         Transaction Type
                                  R/O/C           Valid Entries                 Business Rules
                                  I R                  I        R                    I                 R
        CTQ TN Section            N            1-9                    Populated by Qwest
        TNSQ Selected TNs         C            Dashes are             If not populated, all reserved
        Section                                required in            TNS will be returned.
                                               positions 4 & 8.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS: 2 numerics
       For the Transaction Type of TNSQ: 12 alphanumeric characters

        EXAMPLES:

             2

        3    0   3    -     1    2   3     -     4     5   6   7




                                                 341
                                                                     Effective October 25, 2010
                                                           LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



49d.    QNSNUM – Quantity of Non-Selected Numbers – Qwest-Specific Field –
Not currently used by Qwest
       Identifies the quantity of Non-Selected Telephone Numbers.




                                           342
                                                                                 Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                       LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120




49e.   NSELTN – Non-Selected Telephone Number – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the Non-Selected Telephone Number

            NOTE 1:         This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:             This field is optional.

         Transaction Type
                                   R/O/C           Valid Entries                     Business Rules
                                   I R         I           R            I                     R
        TNSR Non-                     O             Dashes are               Populated if the RESPONSE
        Selected TNs                                required in              field = M.
        Section                                     character
                                                    positions 4 and
                                                    8.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                                12 alphanumeric characters

        EXAMPLE:

        3    0    3    -       9    6      5       -    1     2    3     4




                                                   343
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



50.   AVD – Available Date – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies the date the pending feature/service is expected to be available.




                                             344
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



51.   PICLIS – InterLATA PIC List – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies the carriers that can provide InterLATA service at a specific central office, in
      response to an inquiry from the customer.




                                             345
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



52.   LPICLIS – IntraLATA PIC List – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies the carriers that can provide IntraLATA service at a specific central office, in
      response to an inquiry from the customer.




                                             346
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



53.   IPICLIS – International PIC List – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies the carriers that can provide international service at a specific central office, in
      response to an inquiry from the customer.




                                               347
                                                                       Effective October 25, 2010
                                                             LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



54.   WTN - Working Telephone Number
      Identifies the working telephone number at the end user's location.

           NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

       USAGE:           This field is conditional.

       Transaction
          Type          R/O/C        Valid Entries                     Business Rules
                        I R              I         R                 I                    R
       AVQ - WTN        C        TN or AN (not           Required if the
       Section                   including               SEARCHTYP field = T,
                                 Customer Code)          otherwise optional.

                                 Dashes are
                                 required in
                                 character
                                 positions 4 and
                                 8.
       AAQ - WTN        R        Format is either:       If TXTYP = D or U, a
       Section                   NPA-NXX-                WTN or NPA-NXX
                                 NNNN or                 (NPA -NXX of the
                                 NPA-NXX.                WTN or the LSO/WC)
                                                         is required.
                                 A dash is
                                 always required         WTN must match either
                                 in position 4           the AN or one of the
                                 and, if WTN,            TNs on the work order
                                 also required in        request (LSR), when the
                                 position 8.             work order is submitted.

                                                         If TXTYP = C, WTN
                                                         must not be populated.
       AVR WTN               C                                                      This field is
       Section                                                                      required when
                                                                                    the section is
                                                                                    present.

                                                                                    WTN,
                                                                                    WTNSTAT,
                                                                                    and LNAME
                                                                                    may repeat as a
                                                                                    group.




                                             348
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120




54.    WTN - Working Telephone Number (continued)


      Transaction
         Type        R/O/              Valid Entries                      Business Rules
                       C
                     I R                    I          R               I                         R
      FAQ -          C               Dashes are            Required if the
      Telephone                      required in           TNADDRCKTIND field
      Number                         character             = T.
      Address                        positions 4 and
      Circuit                        8.                    Must be an existing TN
      Indicator                                            at the end user address.
      Section
      RLDQ –         C                                     Required if the
      Raw Loop                                             TNADDRCKTIND field
      Data Query                                           = T.
      Section
      RLDR –                 R                                                            WTNNUM and
      Raw Loop                                                                            WTN repeat as
      Data Section                                                                        a group up to 24
                                                                                          times.

                                                                                          Populated if
                                                                                          returned.
      LQQ Query      C               Dashes                Required when the
      by WTN                         required in           TNADDRCKTIND field
      Section                        character             = T.
                                     positions 4 and
                                     8.
      LQR Circuit            C                                                            WTN of 000-
      Information                                                                         00-0000
      and                                                                                 indicates spare
      Counters                                                                            loop for Qwest
      Section                                                                             Broadband

                                                                                          May repeat as a
                                                                                          group.

      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                            12 alphanumeric characters

      EXAMPLE:           3       0      3    -    5    4    5    -    9    7    3     1




                                                 349
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



55.   WSOPI – Working Service on Premises Indicator – Not currently used by
      Qwest
      Indicates if there is a working service at the end-user location.




                                              350
                                                                                Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                      LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



56.   LST – Local Service Termination
      Identifies the CLLI code of the end office switch from which service is being provided.

        NOTE 1:         This field may be used for Inquiries and Responses

       USAGE:           This field is conditional.

         Transaction Type
                                   R/O/C            Valid                       Business Rules
                                                   Entries
                                   I       R       I    R    I                           R
       AAQ Miscellaneous           C                                 Switch CLLI code:
       Section                                                         If TXTYP = C, LST must be
                                                                       populated.
                                                                       If TXTYP = D or U, LST must not be
                                                                       populated.
       LQR Loop Level                      C                         Populated If returned. Same as CLLI
       Data Response                                                 code.
       Section
                                                                     This field is present when a good or
                                                                     mixed response (RESPONSE = G or
                                                                     RESPONSE = M with MIXTYPE = P)
                                                                     is returned from a search and the query
                                                                     was for either Loop Level Data or Qwest
                                                                     Broadband (LPAC = Blank or BBND).
                                                                     This field repeats the same number of
                                                                     times as the value in the ECCKTQ field.

      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                              11 alphanumeric characters

      EXAMPLE:            D    N       V       R     C   O       0     1    D    S    1




                                                   351
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



57.   NC – Network Channel Code
      Identifies the network channel code for the circuit(s) involved. The network channel code
      describes the channel being requested.

        NOTE 1:         The format and structure of this field is defined by ANSI in document
                        T1.223, Structure and Representation of Network Channel (NC) and
                        Network Channel Interface (NCI) Codes for the North American
                        Telecommunications System. The Network Channel Code consists of the
                        following elements:

           1.     Channel Service Code – Positions 1 and 2 describe the channel service code in
                  an encoded form. The channel service code will typically be specified as the
                  service code of the special service circuit or the transmission grade of the
                  message trunk circuit (2 alpha or 2 alpha/numeric characters).

           2.     Optional Feature Code – Positions 3 and 4 represent the option codes available
                  for each channel service code. Standard combinations of this code will allow the
                  customer to enhance the technical performance of the requested channel, or to
                  further identify the type of service. It is also used to specify options such as
                  conditioning, effective 4-wire, multiplexing, etc. (2 alpha or 2 alpha/numeric
                  characters).

        NOTE 2:         This field may be used for Inquiries.

       USAGE:           This field is conditional.

        Transaction Type
                              R/O/C               Valid Entries                  Business Rules
                              I R                     I                 R            I            R
       AAQ                    C          LX--, LX-N, LXR-, AD--,             Required when the
       Miscellaneous                     ADU-, HC--, HCD-, HCE-,             TXTYP field = C
       Section                           HCF-, HCG-, HCJ-, HCZ-,             or U.
                                         HF--, and HFC-
                                                                             If TXTYP = C, NC
                                                                             must be LX--.
       LQQ Loop               C          LXR-                                Prohibited if MS
       Qualification                                                         field = A.
       Query Section                                                         Required when
                                                                             NCI field is
                                                                             populated,
                                                                             otherwise
                                                                             prohibited.

      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          4 alphanumeric characters

      EXAMPLE:            L    X     R     -




                                               352
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



58.   NCI – Network Channel Interface Code
      Identifies the electrical conditions on the circuit at the ACTL/Primary location.


        NOTE 1:         The format and structure of this field is defined by ANSI in document
                        T1.223, Structure and Representation of Network Channel (NC) and
                        Network Channel Interface (NCI) Codes for the North American
                        Telecommunications System. The Network Channel Code consists of the
                        following elements:

           1.     Total Conductors - Positions 1 and 2 identify the total number of physical
                  conductors (e.g., wires) required at the interface (2 numeric characters).

           2.     Protocol - Positions 3 and 4 identify the requirements for the interface regarding
                  signaling and transmission (2 alpha characters).

           3.     Impedance - Position 5 identifies the nominal reference impedance that will
                  terminate the channel for the purpose of evaluating transmission performance (1
                  alpha/numeric character).

           4.     Delimiter #1 - Position 6 identifies the start of the protocol option field if a
                  protocol option code is assigned.

           5.     Protocol Options - Positions 7, 8 and 9 identify additional features (e.g., bit rate,
                  bandwidth, etc.) on the protocol to be used (3 alpha/numeric characters).

           6.     Delimiter #2 - Position 10 identifies the start of the Transmission Level Points
                  (TLP) field if a TLP is assigned.
           7.     Transmission Level - Positions 11 and 12 identify the TLPs from either the
                  Exchange Carrier (EC)/service provider or customer end.

                     NOTE 1:         Position 11 identifies the TLP transmit signal level at the
                                     EC/service provider when transmitting to the customer.

                     NOTE 2:         Position 12 identifies the TLP receive signal level at the
                                     EC/service provider when receiving from the customer.

                     NOTE 3:         If TLP is entered in one character position only (transmit or
                                     receive), a hyphen or the letter “O” is required as a field filler
                                     in the associated TLP character position.

                     NOTE 4:         If TLPs are not to be coded, default levels found in Telcordia
                                     Technologies Technical Publications will apply and the TLP
                                     character positions will be left blank.




                                             353
                                                                      Effective October 25, 2010
                                                            LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120




58.    NCI - Network Channel Interface (continued)


       NOTE 2:      This field must also be compatible with the NC on the request.

       NOTE 3:      If the protocol option field is not coded and the TLP is coded, a double
                    delimiter #1 and #2 will be placed after character position five (5). In this
                    case, delimiter #1 will be in character position six (6), and delimiter #2 will
                    be in character position seven (7). The TLP will be left justified into
                    character positions eight (8) and nine (9) accordingly.

       NOTE 4:      This field may be used for Inquiries.

       NOTE 5:      NCI codes are outlined in Telcordia Technologies practice BR 795-403-
                    100.

      USAGE:        This field is conditional.

        Transaction Type
                                R/O/C         Valid Entries               Business Rules
                                I R               I         R                   I                 R
      LQQ Loop                  C           02QB9.00A            Prohibited if MS field = A.
      Qualification Query                   02QB9.01A            Required when the NC field
      Section                               02QB9.00C            is populated, otherwise
                                            02QB9.01C            prohibited.

      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                       12 alphanumeric characters

      EXAMPLE:         0    2    Q      B     5    .   0     0   A




                                            354
                                                                       Effective October 25, 2010
                                                             LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



59.   SECNCI – Secondary Network Channel Interface Code – Not currently
      used by Qwest
      Identifies the electrical conditions on the circuit at the secondary ACTL or end-user location.




                                             355
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



60.   CS - Class of Service
      Identifies the class of service for this inquiry.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Inquires.

       USAGE:            This field is conditional.

         Transaction Type
                                   R/O/C        Valid Entries                  Business Rules
                                   I R               I            R                 I             R
       FAQ – RPL or RFR            C         Applicable USOC          Required if the SCATEG
       Section                                                        field = H or D.

      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           5 alphanumeric characters

      EXAMPLE:              1    A    M     1     2




                                                356
                                                                              Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                    LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



INFORMATIONAL SECTION:
This Section, equating to fields NITEQ through ITEXT, is filled in only if RESPONSE = M and
MIXTYPE = P.

  60a.    NITEQ – Number of Informational Text Entries – Qwest-Specific Field –
  Not currently used by Qwest
            Identifies the number of informational text entries returned.




                                                   357
                                                                               Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                     LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



60b.   WTN – Working Telephone Number Associated with Information Text –
Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the working telephone number associated with the information text.

            NOTE 1:        This field may be used on Responses.

        USAGE:            This field is conditional.

         Transaction Type
                                 R/O/C         Valid Entries                      Business Rules
                                 I R       I          R               I                    R
        LQR -                        C                                        Repeats the same number of
        Informational                                                          times as the value in the
        Section                                                                NITEQ field.
                                                                              Populated if returned.
        RLDR -                        C                                       Repeats the same number of
        Informational                                                          times as the value in the
        Section                                                                NITEQ field.
                                                                              Populated if returned.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                               20 alphanumeric characters

        EXAMPLE:

            3    0    3    -    7    7    7     -      3     4   5     6




                                               358
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



60c.   ITYPE – Information Type – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the information type related to the loop qualification.

             NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

        VALID ENTRIES:
           I = Incomplete
           U = Undetermined

        USAGE:            This field is conditional.

         Transaction Type
                                 R/O/C                          Business Rules
                                 I R        I                            R
        LQR -                        C           Populated if WTN above is populated
        Informational
        Section
        RDLR -                        C          Populated if WTN above is populated
        Informational
        Section

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          1 alphanumeric characters

        EXAMPLE:

            I




                                                359
                                                                           Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                 LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



60d.       ITEXT – Information Text – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the information text associated with the information type above.

                 NOTE 1:    This field may be used on Responses.

           USAGE:          This field is conditional.

            Transaction Type
                                  R/O/C         Valid Entries               Business Rules
                                  I R       I          R           I                    R
           LQR -                      C                                   Populated if ITYPE above is
           Informational                                                  populated.
           Section
           RLDR -                      C                                  Populated if ITYPE above is
           Informational                                                  populated.
           Section

           DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                        255 alphanumeric characters

           EXAMPLE:

       O     S     S        G     A     T       E    W A        Y         A      C       O    M M U     I
       C     A     T   I    O     N             P    R O        B L       E    M         H    A S       O
       C     C     U   R    R     E     D              C        O U       L    D         N    O T       O
       B     T     A   I    N           L       O    O P          L       E    V E       L      D A     T
       A           F   O    R           3       0    3 -        8 8       9    - 1       2    3 4




                                                  360
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



61.   SVCCFG – Service Configuration – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies the way in which the existing service is configured.




                                             361
                                                                      Effective October 25, 2010
                                                            LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



62.   LNUM – Line Number – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies the line as a unique number and each additional occurrence as a unique number.




                                           362
                                                                                     Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                           LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



63.   ECCKT - Exchange Company Circuit ID
      Identifies a CLEC’s circuit identification.

            NOTE 1:         This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

       USAGE:              This field is conditional.

           Transaction
              Type                R/O/C            Valid                            Business Rules
                                                  Entries
                                  I       R       I    R                      I                          R
       FAQ –                      C                             Required if the SCATEG
       Telephone                                                field = U and the
       Number Address                                           TNADDRCKTIND field =
       Circuit Indicator                                        C, otherwise not applicable.
       Section
       FAR –                              O                                                    This field is present
       Unbundled Loop                                                                          when the RESPONSE
       Section                                                                                 field = G and the
                                                                                               SCATEG field = U.
       RLDQ – Circuit             C                             Required if
       ID Query Section                                         TNADDRCKTIND field =
                                                                C, otherwise not applicable
       RLDR – Raw                         R                                                    Required if the
       Loop Data                                                                               RESPONSE field = G.
       Section
       LQR Circuit                        C                                                    Populated if returned.
       Information and
       Counters Section                                                                        May repeat as a group.

           DATA CHARACTERISTICS:
           For the Transaction Type of FAQ, FAR and LQR: 42 alphanumeric characters
           For the Transaction Type of RLDR: 60 alphanumeric characters
           For the Transaction Type of RLDQ: 42 alphanumberic characters (Valid ECCKT format:
           N<n>.AAAA.NNN<nnn>..AA)

       EXAMPLE:

       3     0   3     -      9       6       5      -      1     2    3    4

       4     .   L    X       F       U       .     1       2     3    4    5   6     .   .    P     N




                                                         363
                                                                              Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                    LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



63a.   PRIMARY NPANXX – Primary NPA-NXX
       Identifies the local serving office of a CLEC’s circuit.

             NOTE 1:        This field may be used on Inquires and Responses.

        USAGE:             This field is conditional.

            Transaction
               Type               R/O/C        Valid                        Business Rules
                                              Entries
                                  I       R   I    R                  I                        R
        RLDQ – Circuit            C                      Required if
        ID Query Section                                 TNADDRCKTIND field =
                                                         C, otherwise not applicable

            DATA CHARACTERISTICS: 6 numeric characters

        EXAMPLE:

        3     0   3    9      5       6




                                                   364
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



64.   SMC – Spectrum Management Classes – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies the attributes that correspond to different types of xDSL technologies.




                                             365
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



64a.   TYPE – Transport Protocol Type – Qwest-Specific Field
       Identifies the type of transport protocol.


        VALID ENTRIES:
           ATM = Asynchronous Transfer Mode
           ETH = Ethernet
           Blank

        USAGE:            This field is conditional.
           Transaction
              Type             R/O/C        Valid                        Business Rules
                                           Entries
                              I     R      I      R                I                      R
        LQQ Loop              C          ATM             This field is required
        Qualification                    ETH              for Ethernet loop
        Query Section                    Blank            qualifications.
                                                         This field is
                                                          prohibited when
                                                          Market Segment
                                                          (MS) = B.



       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          3 alphanumeric characters

        EXAMPLE:

            A    T    M




                                               366
                                                                               Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                     LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



65.   LOOPSTAT - Loop Status
      Identifies the status of the loop qualification.

            NOTE 1:             This field may be used on Responses.

      VALID ENTRIES:

      A          =       Facilities Qualified
      B          =       Facilities Not Qualified
      C          =       Construction Job Required
      D          =       Bona Fide Request (BFR) Required
      E          =       Conditioning Required
      F          =       Not Qualified due to Length
      G          =       Not Qualified due to Pair Gain
      H          =       Not Qualified due to Digital Single Subscriber Carrier (DSSC)
      J          =       Not Qualified due to Disturber
      K          =       Work Order in Progress
      U          =       Undetermined – Qwest-Specific Entry
      CNF        =       Connected Facility; non-primary end-to-end loops to a unique living unit –
                         Qwest-Specific Entry
      CT         =       Connected Through; primary connected through spare – Qwest-Specific Entry
      PCF        =       Partially Connected Facilities; loops which are connected only in the latter
                         segments, e.g. crossbox to customer – Qwest-Specific Entry
      RWKG =             Remote Working – Qwest-Specific Entry
      WKG =              Working – Qwest-Specific Entry

       USAGE:                  This field is conditional.

           Transaction Type
                                        R/O/C          Valid Entries                  Business Rules
                                        I R        I          R          I                    R
       RLDR – Raw Loop                     O            CNF, CT,             Optional when the RESPONSE field =
       Data Section                                     PCF, RWKG,           G.
                                                        WKG
                                                                             This field repeats the same number of
                                                                             times as the value in the ECCKTQ
                                                                             field.
       LQR Loop                              C          A, B, C, D, E,       This field is present when a good or
       Qualification                                    F, G, H, J, K,       mixed response is returned from a
       Response Section                                 U                    search and the query was for either
                                                                             Unbundled ADSL or Qwest
                                                                             Broadband (RESPONSE = G or
                                                                             RESPONSE = M and MIXTYPE = P).
       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:
       For the Transaction Type of RLDR: 4 alphanumeric characters
       For the Transaction Type of LQR: 1 alphanumeric character
       EXAMPLE:
       R     W       K     G

       A


                                                       367
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120


66.   PGPRES – Pair Gain/DLC Presence
      Identifies the presence of Pair Gain/Digital Loop Carrier (DLC) on the loop.

        NOTE 1:         This field may be used for Responses.

       USAGE:           This field is conditional.

        Transaction Type
                               R/O/C         Valid Entries                  Business Rules
                               I R       I          R           I                    R
       LQR Loop Level              C          A = Yes –             This field is populated when Pair
       Data Response                          Qwest-                Gain or DLC is present on the
       Section                                Specific Entry        loop and the facilities qualified
                                              N = No –              (LOOPSTAT = A).
                                              Qwest-
                                              Specific Entry        This field is present when a good
                                                                    or mixed response (RESPONSE =
                                                                    G or RESPONSE = M with
                                                                    MIXTYPE = P) is returned from a
                                                                    search and the query was for
                                                                    either Loop Level Data or Qwest
                                                                    Broadband (LPAC = Blank or
                                                                    BBND).

                                                                    This field repeats the same
                                                                    number of times as the value in
                                                                    the ECCKTQ field.

      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          1 alpha character

      EXAMPLE:            A




                                              368
                                                                       Effective October 25, 2010
                                                             LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



67.   DLCTYPE – DLC Type – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies the type of Digital Loop Carrier (DLC) on the loop.




                                            369
                                                                      Effective October 25, 2010
                                                            LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



68.   DSSCP – DSSC Presence – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies the presence of Digital Single Subscriber Carrier (DSSC) on the loop.




                                            370
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



69.   LM – Loop Make-Up Type – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies whether the loop qualification inquiry/response is based on the total length of the
      loop or each loop segment/sub-segment.




                                             371
                                                                       Effective October 25, 2010
                                                             LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



70.   LCI – Location Code Identifier – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies the type of location being represented as the loop segment reference point.




                                            372
                                                                     Effective October 25, 2010
                                                           LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



71.   LC – Location Code – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies the Network Site Code or CLLI Code of the location associated to the loop segment
      (e.g. FDI/cross box).




                                           373
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



72.   LCA – Location Code Address – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies the concatenated address and/or descriptive representation for the location.




                                             374
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



73.   LLT – Loop Length Type
      Identifies the process used to determine the loop length.

        NOTE 1:         This field may be used for Responses.

      VALID ENTRIES:

              A     =   Actual
              B     =   Estimated – Not currently used by Qwest
              C     =   Electrical – Not currently used by Qwest
              E     =   Estimated – Qwest-Specific Entry

        NOTE 1:         A valid entry of “A” indicates that a determination has been made by the
                        provider that approximates the actual length of the loop.

        NOTE 2:         A valid entry of “B” indicates an estimated loop length determined by
                        design models.

        NOTE 3:         A valid entry of “C” indicates measurements based on capacitance tests,
                        which may include bridge taps under 6 kft in length.

       USAGE:           This field is conditional.

        Transaction Type
                               R/O/C         Valid Entries                    Business Rules
                               I R       I          R             I                     R
       LQR Loop Level              C          See VALID               This field is present when a good
       Data Response                          ENTRIES.                or mixed response (RESPONSE =
       Section                                                        G or RESPONSE = M with
                                                                      MIXTYPE = P) is returned from a
                                                                      search and the query was for
                                                                      either Loop Level Data or Qwest
                                                                      Broadband (LPAC = Blank or
                                                                      BBND).
                                                                      This field repeats the same
                                                                      number of times as the value in
                                                                      the ECCKTQ field.

      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          1 alphanumeric character

      EXAMPLE:            A




                                              375
                                                                      Effective October 25, 2010
                                                            LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



74.   GA – Gauge – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies the gauge (diameter) of the cable or cable segment/sub-segment.




                                           376
                                                                                 Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                       LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



75.   LL – Loop Length
      Identifies the distance from the end-user location to the wire center.

        NOTE 1:          Actual or electrical length information may be provided when available. If
                         not available, some providers may return estimated information based on a
                         design model. The Loop Length Type (LLT) field is used to designate
                         whether the loop length is actual, electrical or estimated.

        NOTE 2:          Some providers may return electric loop length, which is determined by
                         measurements based on capacitance tests.

        NOTE 3:          Length may include bridge tap.

        NOTE 4:          Measurements will always be provided in kilofeet (kft) or kilometers (km).

        NOTE 5:          This field may be used for Responses.

       USAGE:           This field is conditional.

        Transaction Type
                                  R/O/C             Valid                      Business Rules
                                                  Entries
                                  I       R       I    R         I                           R
       LQR Loop Level                     C                              This field is present when a good or
       Data Response                                                     mixed response (RESPONSE field =
       Section                                                           G or RESPONSE = M with
                                                                         MIXTYPE = P) is returned from a
                                                                         search and the query was for either
                                                                         Loop Level Data or Qwest Broadband
                                                                         (LPAC = Blank or BBND).
                                                                         This field repeats the same number of
                                                                         times as the value in the ECCKTQ
                                                                         field.

      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                                   11 alphanumeric characters

      EXAMPLE:                1       1       .     5     K      F   T




                                                    377
                                                                 Effective October 25, 2010
                                                       LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



76.   ILL – Incremental Loop Length – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies the length of the loop sub-segment.




                                            378
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



77.   LU – Length Unit – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies the unit of measurement used to calculate the associated field length.




                                             379
                                                                                  Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                        LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



78.   LLG – Loop Length By Gauge
      Identifies the segment loop length(s) by gauge for the total distance from the end-user
      location to the wire center.

        NOTE 1:         Actual or electrical length information may be provided when available. If
                        not available, some providers may return estimated information based on a
                        design model. The Loop Length Type (LLT) field is used to designate
                        whether the loop length is actual, electrical or estimated.

        NOTE 2:         Length may include bridge tap.

        NOTE 3:         This field may be used for Responses.

      VALID ENTRIES:

              1st and 2nd Characters (Gauge Codes)
                          19 – Currently not used by Qwest
                          22 – Currently not used by Qwest
                          24 – Currently not used by Qwest
                          26 – Currently not used by Qwest
              3rd Character (Delimiter)
                          G = Gauge
              4th-14th Characters (Length)
                          Length + kft
                          Length + km

       USAGE:           This field is conditional.

        Transaction Type
                                 R/O/C           Valid Entries                        Business Rules
                                 I R         I          R                I                     R
       LQR Loop Level                C            See VALID                  This field is present when a good
       Data Response                              ENTRIES.                   or mixed response (RESPONSE =
       Section                                                               G or RESPONSE = M with
                                                                             MIXTYPE = P) is returned from a
                                                                             search and the query was for
                                                                             either Loop Level Data or Qwest
                                                                             Broadband (LPAC = Blank or
                                                                             BBND).
                                                                             If returned, will repeat 5 times.

      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                                 14 alphanumeric characters

      EXAMPLE:               1     9     G        1     1      .    2        5   K   F    T




                                                  380
                                                                           Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                 LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



78a.   LOOPQUALMESG – Loop Qualification Message – Qwest-Specific Field
       XML: LOOPQUALMSG
       Indicates a message that is returned explaining that a product was or was not qualified and
       why.

         NOTE 1:         This field may be used for Responses.

        USAGE:           This field is conditional.

          Transaction Type
                                 R/O/C          Valid Entries                  Business Rules
                                 I R        I          R           I                    R
        LQR Loop                    C            Variable Text         This field is present when a good
        Qualification                                                  or mixed response is returned
        Response Section                                               from a search and the query was
                                                                       for either Unbundled ADSL or
                                                                       Qwest Broadband. (RESPONSE
                                                                       = G or RESPONSE = M and
                                                                       MIXTYPE = P).

                                                                       This field repeats the same
                                                                       number of times as the value in
                                                                       the ECCKTQ field.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           1024 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:              Q    U    A     L     I    F    I    E    D

         NOTE 1:         The actual length of the field is 1024 characters. In order to save space in
                         this document, only the 1st 15 spaces are shown.




                                                381
                                                                      Effective October 25, 2010
                                                            LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



78b.     LLGQ – Loop Length by Gauge Quantity – Qwest-Specific Field – Not
currently used by Qwest
       Indicates the total number segments represented by the LLG field.




                                            382
                                                                               Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                     LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



79.   ELL – Equivalent Loop Length
      Identifies the 26-gauge equivalent loop length for the total distance from the end-user location
      to the wire center.

        NOTE 1:         The equivalent loop length is derived by multiplying the LL field by the
                        appropriate 26-gauge conversion factor including bridge tap if applicable.

        NOTE 2:         Actual or electrical length information may be provided when available. If
                        not available, some providers may return estimated information based on a
                        design model. The Loop Length Type (LLT) field is used to designate
                        whether the loop length is actual, electrical or estimated.

        NOTE 3:         Measurements will always be provided in kilofeet (kft) or kilometers (km).

        NOTE 4:         This field may be used for Responses.

       USAGE:           This field is conditional.

        Transaction Type
                                 R/O/C           Valid Entries                     Business Rules
                                 I R         I          R              I                     R
       LQR Loop Level                C                                     This field is present when a good
       Data Response                                                       or mixed response (RESPONSE =
       Section                                                             G or RESPONSE = M with
                                                                           MIXTYPE = P) is returned from a
                                                                           search and the query was for
                                                                           either Loop Level Data or Qwest
                                                                           Broadband (LPAC = Blank or
                                                                           BBND).

                                                                           This field repeats the same
                                                                           number of times as the value in
                                                                           the ECCKTQ field.

      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                                 11 alphanumeric characters

      EXAMPLE:               1     2     .        2     5      K   F       T




                                                  383
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



80.   LCQ – Load Coil Quantity – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies the quantity of load coils present on the loop from the end-user location to the wire
      center.




                                             384
                                                                           Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                 LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



81.   LCT - Load Coil Type
      Identifies the type of load coil(s) present on the loop.

            NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

       USAGE:            This field is optional.

         Transaction
            Type           R/O/C       Valid                          Business Rules
                                      Entries
                            I   R     I    R       I                         R
       RLDR – Raw               O                      This field may be populated when the
       Loop Data                                       RESPONSE field = G.
       Section
       LQR Load                 C                      Populated if returned.
       Coil Section

      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                            5 alphanumeric characters

      EXAMPLE:             H     8    8

        NOTE 1:          This example indicates load coil spacing at 6000 feet with a load coil
                         inductance of 88 millihenries.




                                              385
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



82.   LCL – Load Coil Location – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies the location of load coils in the loop from the end-user location to the wire center.




                                             386
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



83.   BTQ – Bridge Tap Quantity
      Identifies the quantity of bridge taps present on the loop from the end-user location to the wire
      center.

        NOTE 1:         Actual bridge tap information may be provided when available. If not
                        available, some providers may return estimated information based on a
                        design model. The Loop Length Type (LLT) field is used to designate
                        whether the loop length is actual or estimated. If the LLT value is not “B”,
                        BTQ is assumed to be “actual”.

        NOTE 2:         This field may be used for Responses.

       USAGE:           This field is conditional.

          Transaction
             Type              R/O/C         Valid                    Business Rules
                                           Entries
                               I       R   I     R   I                          R
       LQR Load Coil                   C                 This field repeats the same number of times
       Section                                           as the value in the ECCKTQ field.

                                                         Populated if returned.

      DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          2 numeric characters

      EXAMPLE:             0       2




                                               387
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



84.   BTL – Bridge Tap Location – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies the location of bridge tap on the loop from the end-user location to the wire center.




                                             388
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



85.   BTLEN – Bridge tap Length – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies the length of bridge tap associated with the loop from the end-user location to the
      wire center.




                                             389
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



86.   AFS – Assembled Facilities Status – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies the condition of the existing facility(s) as assembled in the field.




                                              390
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



87.   CA – Cable – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies the specific feeder or distribution cable within a wire center.




                                              391
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



88.   CHAN/PAIR – Channel/Pair – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies the specific channel or pair within the provider’s cable to be used for connection.




                                             392
                                                                     Effective October 25, 2010
                                                           LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



89.   TRMED – Transmission Medium Type – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies the specific medium or system type supporting the loop segment.




                                           393
                                                                      Effective October 25, 2010
                                                            LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



90.   LMSTAT – Loop Make-Up Status – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies the status of the loop make-up returned.




                                             394
                                                              Effective October 25, 2010
                                                    LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



91.   LDSP – Load Spacing – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies the distance between load coils.




                                             395
                                                                       Effective October 25, 2010
                                                             LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



92.   TYCA – Type of Cable – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies the type of cable associated with the loop or loop segment.




                                            396
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



93.   CAPAC – Capacitance – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies the capacitance of a cable gauge per mile.




                                             397
                                                               Effective October 25, 2010
                                                     LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



94.   BOCAP – Build Out Capacitance – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies the capacitance of the build out.




                                              398
                                                              Effective October 25, 2010
                                                    LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



95.   BORES – Build Out Resistance – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies the resistance of the build out.




                                              399
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



96.   BOOFF – Build Out Offset – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies the distance from the central office side of the segment to the build out.




                                             400
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



97.   ABP – Assignable Binding Post – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies the binding post associated with a fiber channel used to support the end user.




                                             401
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



98.   SSC – Single Subscriber Carrier Indicator – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies that two circuits are associated with the physical loop and the applicable connecting
      service.




                                             402
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



99.   RTF – Receive/Transmit Indicator – Not currently used by Qwest
      Identifies if a pair is used to support the receive or transmit side of a 4-wire service.




                                              403
                                                                            Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                  LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



100.   F1DT – F1 Disturber Type – Not currently used by Qwest
       Identifies the type of disturber present in the feeder facility(ies).




                                                404
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



101.   F1DL – F1 Disturber Location – Not currently used by Qwest
       Identifies the proximity of the disturber within the feeder facility(s).




                                               405
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



102.   F1LPCP – F1 Loop Composition
       Identifies the composition of the loop material (serving technology type) of the feeder
       facility(ies).

         NOTE 1:         This field may be used for Responses.

       VALID ENTRIES:

               A     =   Coaxial
               B     =   Copper
               C     =   Fiber
               Y     =   PG – Qwest-Specific Entry
               Z     =   UDC – Qwest-Specific Entry

        USAGE:           This field is conditional.

           Transaction
              Type             R/O/C       Valid                          Business Rules
                                         Entries
                               I   R     I     R      I                          R
        LQR Bridged                C                      This field repeats the same number of times
        Tap Section                                       as the value in the ECCKTQ field.

                                                          Populated if returned.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          1 alpha character

       EXAMPLE:            B




                                              406
                                                                            Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                  LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120




103.   F2DT – F2 Disturber Type – Not currently used by Qwest
       Identifies the type of disturber present in the distribution facility(ies).




                                                407
                                                                           Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                 LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120




104.   F2DL – F2 Disturber Location – Not currently used by Qwest
       Identifies the proximity of the disturber within the distribution facility(ies).




                                               408
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



105.   F2LPCP – F2 Loop Composition
       Identifies the composition of the loop material (serving technology type) of the distribution
       facility (ies).

         NOTE 1:         This field may be used for Responses.

       VALID ENTRIES:

               A     =   Coaxial
               B     =   Copper
               C     =   Fiber
               Y     =   PG – Qwest-Specific Entry
               Z     =   UDC – Qwest-Specific Entry

        USAGE:           This field is conditional.

           Transaction
              Type              R/O/C      Valid                          Business Rules
                                         Entries
                                I   R    I     R      I                          R
        LQR Bridged                 C                     This field repeats the same number of times
        Tap Section                                       as the value in the ECCKTQ field.

                                                          Populated if returned.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          1 alpha character

       EXAMPLE:             B




                                              409
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



106.   LPAC – Loop Product Available Code
       Identifies which products are available for resale based on the loop length.

         NOTE 1:         This field may be used for Responses.

        USAGE:           This field is conditional.

          Transaction Type
                                   R/O/C         Valid Entries               Business Rules
                                   I R       I          R          I                   R
        LQR Loop                      C           BBND                 Populated if returned.
        Qualification                             UADSL                This field is present when a
        Response Section                          Not Populated        good or mixed response is
                                                  = Loop Level         returned from a search and the
                                                  Data                 query was for either Unbundled
                                                                       ADSL or Qwest Broadband.
                                                                       (RESPONSE = G or
                                                                       RESPONSE = M and
                                                                       MIXTYPE = P)

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          5 alphanumeric characters

       EXAMPLE:               B    B    N     D




                                              410
                                                                      Effective October 25, 2010
                                                            LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



107.   LSA – Loop Speeds Available – Not currently used by Qwest
       Identifies the specific xDSL downstream/upstream speeds that are available.




                                            411
                                                                     Effective October 25, 2010
                                                           LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



108.   ILD – Insertion Loss In Decibels – Not currently used by Qwest
       Identifies the amount of signal loss on the loop.




                                              412
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



109.   TC – Taper Code – Not currently used by Qwest
       A reference number that identifies the loop between the central office and a serving terminal.




                                             413
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



110.   WCN – Wire Center Name – Not currently used by Qwest
       Identifies the location where the service provider terminates subscriber outside cable plant,
       i.e. their local lines with the necessary testing facilities to maintain them.




                                              414
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



111.   RSUIND – Remote Switch Unit Indicator
       Identifies that the loop originates from a Remote Switch Unit.

         NOTE 1:         This field may be used for Responses.

        USAGE:           This field is conditional.

          Transaction Type
                                  R/O/C         Valid Entries                 Business Rules
                                  I R       I          R           I                   R
        LQR Loop Level                C          Y = Yes               This field repeats the same
        Data Response                                                  number of times as the value in
        Section                                                        the ECCKTQ field.

                                                                       This field is present when a
                                                                       good or mixed response
                                                                       (RESPONSE = G or
                                                                       RESPONSE = M with
                                                                       MIXTYPE = P) is returned from
                                                                       a search and the query was for
                                                                       either Loop Level Data or
                                                                       Qwest Broadband (LPAC =
                                                                       Blank or BBND).

                                                                       If there is a unit, then the value
                                                                       = Y, otherwise the field is
                                                                       blank.

       DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                          1 alpha character

       EXAMPLE:            Y




                                                415
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



112.   RESPC – Response Code – Not currently used by Qwest
       Identifies a code on the response transaction that represents what occurred on the associated
       inquiry transaction.




                                             416
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



113.   RESPD – Response Description – Not currently used by Qwest
       Identifies the text used to clarify the response for the associated inquiry transaction.




                                               417
                                                              Effective October 25, 2010
                                                    LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



113a.   ERRNUM – Number of Errors – Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently
used by Qwest
       Identifies the number of errors returned.




                                              418
                                                                           Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                 LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



113b.   ERRCODE – Error Code – Qwest-Specific Field
        Identifies a predetermined error code.

             NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

         USAGE:           This field is conditional.

         Transaction
         Type                   R/O/C                 Valid Entries                   Business Rules
                               I     R        I                R                  I            R
         AVR, AAR,                   C              Character Positions 1-3
         ASR, CFAR,                                 = Form Name
         DLRR, FAR,                                 Character Positions 4-
         MPR, RLDR,                                 11 = Field Name
         SAR, CTR,                                  Character Positions 12-
         TNAR, TNSR,                                14 = Error Code
         LQR – Error
         Section

        DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                           14 alphanumeric characters

        EXAMPLE: A V R L N A M E                                              9       7   8




                                                  419
                                                                              Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                    LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



113c.   ERRMESG – Error Message – Qwest-Specific Field
        Indicates additional information about the error.

             NOTE 1:       This field may be used on Responses.

         USAGE:           This field is conditional.

         Transaction Type
                                  R/O/C       Valid Entries                    Business Rules
                                  I   R        I       R              I                 R
         AVR, AAR, ASR,               C
         CFAR, DLRR,
         FAR, MPR,
         RLDR, SAR, CTR,
         TNAR, TNSR,
         LQR – Error
         Section

        DATA CHARACTERISTICS:                              255 alphanumeric characters

        EXAMPLE:

         T H I S            E R R O R                  I    S      N O T         R E V E R S         I
         B L E




                                               420
                                                                         Effective October 25, 2010
                                                               LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



114. PRESPC – Provider Response Code – Not currently used by Qwest
        Identifies a provider specific code on the response transaction that represents what occurred
        on the associated inquiry transaction.




                                              421
                                                                          Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120



115.   PRESPD – Provider Response Description – Not currently used by Qwest
       Identifies the provider’s text used to clarify the response for the associate inquiry transaction.




                                               422
                                                                                 Effective October 25, 2010
                                                                       LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120




   5.0          ALPHANUMERIC GLOSSARY
   The following table is an alphanumeric cross-reference glossary of the pre-order process fields.


Field Abbreviation          Field #    Field Name
AAI                         29         Address Additional Information – Not currently used by Qwest
ABP                         97         Assignable Binding Post – Not currently used by Qwest
ABTIME                      41i        After Before Time - Qwest-Specific Field
ACNA                        7d         Access Carrier Name - Qwest-Specific Field
ADDRES                      32b        Address Type Indicator - Qwest-Specific Field
AFT                         14         Address Format Type
AFS                         86         Assembled Facilities Status – Not currently used by Qwest
AHN                         28a        Assigned House Number - Qwest-Specific Field
ALTADDNUM                   35         Alternate Addresses Number
ALTERNATE STREET            35b        Alternate Street Address - Qwest-Specific Field
ALTLSO                      47         Alternate LSO - Not currently used by Qwest
APPRD                       37         Appointment Request Date
APPRES                      38         Appointment Response Date - Not currently used by Qwest
APPSLOT                     41f        Appointment Slot - Qwest-Specific Field
APPTACT                     1a         Appointment Activity - Qwest-Specific Field
ASGNIND                     39a        Assignment Indicator - Qwest-Specific Field
ASGTRSTN                    32r        Assignment Restriction Code - Qwest-Specific Field
AVAILIND                    41e        Appointment Availability Indicator
AVD                         50         Available Date - Not currently used by Qwest
BOCAP                       94         Build Out Capacitance – Not currently used by Qwest
BOOFF                       96         Build Out Offset - – Not currently used by Qwest
BORES                       95         Build Out Resistance – Not currently used by Qwest
BOX                         28c        Box Number - Qwest-Specific Field
BRIDGE_TAP_OFFSET           39l        Bridge Tap Offset Desctiption - Qwest-Specific Field
_DESC
BTL                         84         Bridge Tap Location - Not currently used by Qwest
BTLEN                       85         Bridge Tap Length - Not currently used by Qwest
BTQ                         83         Bridge Tap Quantity
CA                          87         Cable – Not currently used by Qwest
CABCONN                     38b        Cable Connection - Qwest-Specific Field
CABCONNNUM                  7j         Number of Cable Connection Facilities - Qwest-Specific Field– Not currently
                                       used by Qwest
CABCONNQTY                  7h         Cable Connection Quantity - Qwest-Specific Field
CABNM                       32f        Cable Name - Qwest-Specific Field
CABLE NAME                  39n        Cable Name - Qwest-Specific Field
CABTYP                      32j        Cable Type - Qwest-Specific Field
CAI                         13         Concatenanted Address Information - Not currently used by Qwest
CALA                        32a        Customer Address Location Area - Qwest-Specific Field
CAPAC                       93         Capacitance – Not currently used by Qwest
CARFACCKT                   33d        Carrier’s Facility Circuit - Qwest-Specific Field
CARRNAME                    47l        Carrier Name - Qwest-Specific Field
CARRNUM                     47j        Number of Carriers - Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently used by Qwest
CBLOCK                      46d        Consecutive Block – Qwest-Specific Field
CC                          6          Company Code
CCNA                        1          Customer Carrier Name Abbreviation
CC64FLAG                    35n        64kbps Clear Channel Capability - Qwest-Specific Field
CFAST                       34ab       CFA Status - Qwest-Specific Field

                                                       423
                                                                       Effective October 25, 2010
                                                             LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Abbreviation   Field #   Field Name
CHAN                 34i       Channel - Qwest-Specific Field
CHAN/PAIR            88        Channel/Pair – Not currently used by Qwest
CIC                  47k       Carrier ID - Qwest-Specific Field
CITY                 30        City
CKTFORMAT            33a       Circuit ID Format Type - Qwest-Specific Field
CKTID/CLO            32v       Circuit ID/Circuit Layout Order Number - Qwest-Specific Field
COMPDATE             41g       Completion Date - Qwest-Specific Field
COMPTIME             41h       Completion Time - Qwest-Specific Field
CS                   60        Class of Service
CURACT               32s       Current Activity - Qwest-Specific Field
CUSTOMIND            46i       Custom Indicator – Qwest-Specific Field
D                    32u       Diversity Indicator - Qwest-Specific Field
DESC                 35r       Description - Qwest-Specific Field
DESCRIPTIVE          35a       Descriptive Address - Qwest-Specific Field
DESCNUM              35p       Descriptive Number - Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently used by Qwest
DLCTYPE              67        DLC Type - Not currently used by Qwest
DLRDTL               33h       Design Layout Record Details - Qwest-Specific Field
DLRHDR               33f       DLR Header - Qwest-Specific Field
D/TSENT              3         Date and Time Sent
DSIND                36        Dispatch Indicator
DSSCP                68        DSSCP Presence - Not currently used by Qwest
DSVC                 34m       Dual Service Availability- Qwest-Specific Field
DSLSERV              34k       DSL Service - Qwest-Specific Field
DUEDT                32w       Due Date - Qwest-Specific Field
EAN                  11        Existing Account Number - Not currently used by Qwest
EATN                 12        Existing Account Telephone Number - Not currently used by Qwest
EASNUM               46e       Easy Numbers – Qwest-Specific Field
ECATEG               46f       Easy Number Category – Qwest-Specific Field
ECCKT                63        Exchange Company Circuit ID
ECCKTNUM             39e       Index of ECCKT/roes in Response - Qwest-Specific Field
ECCKTQ               39d       ECCKT Quantity - Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently used by Qwest
EJUST                46h       Easy Word Justification – Qwest-Specific Field
ELL                  79        Equivalent Loop Length
ERRCODE              113b      Error Code - Qwest-Specific Field
ERRMESG              113c      Error Message - Qwest-Specific Field
ERRNUM               113a      Number of Errors - Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently used by Qwest
EWORD                46g       Easy Word to Find – Qwest-Specific Field
FACDES               34g       Facility Designation - Qwest-Specific Field
FACTYP               34h       Facility Type - Qwest-Specific Field
FEATDESC             47g       Feature Title - Qwest-Specific Field
FEATMOD              47c       Feature Modifier - Qwest-Specific Field
FEATNUM              47a       Number of Features - Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently used by Qwest
FEATURE              47b       Feature ID - Qwest-Specific Field
F1DL                 101       F1Disturber Location - Not currently used by Qwest
F1DT                 100       F1 Disturber Type - Not currently used by Qwest
F1LPCP               102       F1 Loop Composition
F2DL                 104       F2 Disturber Location - Not currently used by Qwest
F2DT                 103       F2 Disturber Type - Not currently used by Qwest
F2LPCP               105       F2 Loop Composition
FETAVA               48        Feature Availability
FIRST UNIT           32g       First Unit - Qwest-Specific Field
FRESP                49        Feature/Service Response - Not currently used by Qwest
FTWP                 34        Foreign Township - Not currently used by Qwest
GA                   74        Gauge – Not currently used by Qwest

                                             424
                                                                       Effective October 25, 2010
                                                             LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Abbreviation   Field #   Field Name
GROUPNUM             32i       Number of CFA Groups - Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently used by Qwest
HICABCONN            38f       High Cable Connection - Qwest-Specific Field
HIPOTSSPLIT          38d       High POTS Splitter - Qwest-Specific Field
HNRANGE              36c       House Number Range - Qwest-Specific Field
HNTRES               44        Hunt Group Restriction - Not currently used by Qwest
HUNT                 42        Hunt - Not currently used by Qwest
ILD                  108       Insertion Loss in Decibels - Not currently used by Qwest
ILL                  76        Incremental Loop Length – Not currently used by Qwest
INFOTYPE             7k        Information Type Requested - Qwest-Specific Field
INQRES NBR           41j       Inquiry Response Number - Qwest-Specific Field
INVMSG               38g       Inventory Message - Qwest-Specific Field
INVSTAT              32k       Inventory Status - Qwest-Specific Field
IPICLIS              53        International PIC List - Not currently used by Qwest
ISDNFLAG             35l       ISDN Facility Support Indicator - Qwest-Specific Field
ITEXT                60d       Information Text - Qwest-Specific Field
ITYPE                60c       Information Type - Qwest-Specific Field
JACKNUM              41a       Jack Number - Qwest-Specific Field
LALOC                33        Listed Address Locality - Not currently used by Qwest
LAST UNIT            32h       Last Unit - Qwest-Specific Field
LATACODE             47m       Local Access Transport Area Code - Qwest-Specific Field
LC                   71        Location Code – Not currently used by Qwest
LCA                  72        Location Code Address – Not currently used by Qwest
LCI                  70        Location Code Identifier – Not currently used by Qwest
LCL                  82        Load Coil Location - Not currently used by Qwest
LCQ                  80        Load Coil Quantity - Not currently used by Qwest
LCS                  8         Local Calling Scope – Not currently used by Qwest
LCT                  81        Load Coil Type
LD1                  23        Location Designator 1
LD2                  25        Location Designator 2
LD3                  27        Location Designator 3
LDSP                 91        Load Spacing – Not currently used by Qwest
LINENUM              35s       Number of Lines - Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently used by Qwest
LINESNUM             35q       Number of Lines - Qwest-Specific Field
LINESTAT             34o       Line Status - Qwest-Specific Field
LL                   75        Loop Length
LLG                  78        Loop Length by Gauge
LLGQ                 78b       Loop Length by Gauge Quantity – Qwest-Specific Field - Not currently used by
                               Qwest
LLT                  73        Loop Length Type
LM                   69        Loop Make-Up Type – Not currently used by Qwest
LMSTAT               90        Loop Make-Up Status – Not currently used by Qwest
LNAME                28d       Listed Name - Qwest-Specific Field
LNUM                 62        Line Number - Not currently used by Qwest
LOAD                 35u       Loading - Qwest-Specific Field
LOADPTAMT            39q       Load Points Amount - Qwest-Specific Field
LOCA                 32d       Location A - Qwest-Specific Field
LOCABCONN            38e       Low Cable Connection - Qwest-Specific Field
LOCANFACS            34w       Location A Facility Status - Qwest-Specific Field
LOCARMKS             34x       Location A Remarks - Qwest-Specific Field
LOCZ                 32e       Location Z - Qwest-Specific Field
LOCZNFACS            34y       Location Z Facility Status - Qwest-Specific Field
LOCZRMKS             34z       Location Z Remarks - Qwest-Specific Field
LOOPCHAR             34f       Loop Characteristics - Qwest-Specific Field
LOOPQUALMESG         78a       Loop Qualification Message – Qwest-Specific Fieldfs

                                             425
                                                                        Effective October 25, 2010
                                                              LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Abbreviation   Field #   Field Name
LOOPSTAT             65        Loop Status
LOPOTSSPLIT          38c       Low POTS Splitter - Qwest-Specific Field
LPAC                 106       Loop Product Available Code
LPICLIS              52        IntraLATA PIC List - Not currently used by Qwest
LSA                  107       Loop Speeds Available - Not currently used by Qwest
LSO                  45        Local Service Office
LST                  56        Local Service Termination
LU                   77        Length Unit – Not currently used by Qwest
LV1                  24        Location Value 1
LV2                  26        Location Value 2
LV3                  28        Location Value 3
MAKE_UP_DESC         39m       Make Up Description - Qwest-Specific Field
MCNUM                36b       Multiple CALA Match Number - Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently used by
                               Qwest
MIXTYPE              7b        Mixed Response Type - Qwest-Specific Field
MLTDIST              39h       MLT Distance - Qwest-Specific Field
MOVE                 35v       Can be Moved To - Qwest-Specific Field
MS                   7         Market Segment
MSGTRKCKT            33e       Message Trunk Circuit - Qwest-Specific Field
MUXLOC               34c       MUX Location - Qwest-Specific Field
MUXST                34aa      MUX Status - Qwest-Specific Field
NC                   57        Network Channel Code
NCI                  58        Network Channel Interface Code
NCTN                 37b       Non-Cancelled Telephone Number – Qwest-Specific Field
NDISC                47i       Non-Recurring Discount Percentage - Qwest-Specific Field
NITEQ                60a       Number of Informational Text Entries - Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently used
                               by Qwest
NMNUM                36a       Near Match Number - Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently used by Qwest
NONPREM              1b        Non Premises Work Time - Qwest-Specific Field
NPA                  46a       Preferred NPA – Qwest-Specific Field
NPA/NXX              46        NPA/NXX
NPANXXNUM            47o       Number of NPANXXs - Qwest-Specific Field– Not currently used by Qwest
NRATE                47f       Non-Recurring Retail Rate - Qwest-Specific Field
NSTN                 49e       Non-Selected Telephone Number - Qwest-Specific Field
NTNUM                46c       Nearby Telephone Number – Qwest-Specific Field
NUMDLRDTL            33g       Number of Design Layout Record Details - Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently
                               used by Qwest
NUMPT                34e       Number of Ports - Qwest-Specific Field
NUMSLOTS             41d       Number of Slots - Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently used by Qwest
NXX                  46b       Preferred NXX – Qwest-Specific Field
ORDNUM               34u       Order Number - Qwest-Specific Field
OTHERUSOCS           41c       Other USOCs - Qwest-Specific Field
PAIR_GAIN_TYPE       39o       Pair Gain Type - Qwest-Specific Field
PAIR_NUMBER          39p       Pair Number - Qwest-Specific Field
PCTAVAIL             32m       Percent Available - Qwest-Specific Field
PDORDERDD            34v       Pending Order Due Date - Qwest-Specific Field
PDORDERTYP           34t       Pending Order Type - Qwest-Specific Field
PENDNUM              34s       Pending Order Number - Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently used by Qwest
PGPRES               66        Pair Gain/DLC Presence
PICLIS               51        InterLATA PIC List - Not currently used by Qwest
PNARMK               35d       Primary Number Address Remarks - Qwest-Specific Field
PNARMKNUM            35c       Number of Primary Number Address Remarks - Qwest-Specific Field – Not
                               currently used by Qwest
PNDACT               32t       Pending Activity - Qwest-Specific Field

                                              426
                                                                       Effective October 25, 2010
                                                             LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Abbreviation   Field #   Field Name
PON                  7c        Purchase Order Number - Qwest-Specific Field
POTSSPLIT            38a       POTS Splitter - Qwest-Specific Field
POTSSPLITLOC         7f        POTS Splitter Location - Qwest-Specific Field
POTSSPLITNUM         7i        Number of POTS Split Facilities - Qwest-Specific Field– Not currently used by
                               Qwest
POTSSPLITQTY         7g        POTS Splitter Quantity - Qwest-Specific Field
PRDNOTNUM            34q       Products Not Supported - Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently used by Qwest
PRDNOTSUPP           34r       Products Not Supported - Qwest-Specific Field
PREM                 1c        Premises Work Time - Qwest-Specific Field
PRESPC               114       Provider Response Code – Not currently used by Qwest
PRESPD               115       Provider Response Description – Not currently used by Qwest
PRIMARY NPANXX       63a       Primary NPA-NXX – Qwest-Specific Field
QLR                  7e        Quantity of Lines Requested - Qwest-Specific Field
QNCNUM               37a       Quantity of Non-Cancelled Telephone Numbers – Qwest-Specific Field – Not
                               currently used by Qwest
QNSNUM               49d       Quantity of Non-Selected Numbers - Qwest-Specific Field Field – Not currently
                               used by Qwest
QR                   39        Quantity Requested – Not currently used by Qwest
QTYSPARE             32l       Quantity Spare - Qwest-Specific Field
QUALEXIST            34j       Qualify Existing - Qwest-Specific Field
RANGEIND             36d       Range Indicator – Qwest-Specific Field
RANGEIND             35k       Range Indicator - Qwest-Specific Field
RATEZONE             35h       Rate Zone - Qwest-Specific Field
RDISC                47h       Recurring Discount Percentage - Qwest-Specific Field
REMARK               34p       Remark - Qwest-Specific Field
REMINDER             34n       Reminder - Qwest-Specific Field
REQNUM               41        Requested Number
REQUAL               33i       Re-qualification – Qwest-Specific Field
REQUALEMAIL          33j       Re-qualification Contact Email – Qwest-Specific Field
RESID                10        Response Identifier - Not currently used by Qwest
RESPC                112       Response Code - Not currently used by Qwest
RESPD                113       Response Description - Not currently used by Qwest
RESPONSE             7a        Response Type - Qwest-Specific Field
ROUTE                28b       Rural Route - Qwest-Specific Field
RRATE                47e       Recurring Retail Rate - Qwest-Specific Field
RSUIND               111       Remote Switching Unit Indicator
RTF                  99        Receive/Transmit Indicator – Not currently used by Qwest
SAGMESS              32c       Street Address Guide Message - Qwest-Specific Field
SANO                 16        Service Address Number
SANOR                17        Service Address Number Range - Not currently used by Qwest
SAPR                 15        Service Address Number Prefix
SASD                 19        Service Address Street Directional Prefix
SASF                 18        Service Address Number Suffix
SASN                 20        Service Address Street Name
SASS                 22        Service Address Street Directional Suffix
SATH                 21        Service Address Street Type
SCATEG               5b        Search Category - Qwest-Specific Field
SEARCHTYP            5a        Search Type - Qwest-Specific Field
SECNCI               59        Secondary Network Channel Interface Code - Not currently used by Qwest
SEGMENTNUM           39j       Segment Number – Qwest-Specific Field
SEGMENTQTY           39i       Segment Quantity - Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently used by Qwest
SELNUM               49c       CLEC Selected Telephone Number - Qwest-Specific Field
SERCD                34a       Hi Capacity or Design Service Facilities - Qwest-Specific Field
SERNUMCKT            33b       Serial Number Circuit - Qwest-Specific Field

                                             427
                                                                       Effective October 25, 2010
                                                             LSOG 6 Preparation Guide - POP - 120

Field Abbreviation    Field #   Field Name
SERVON                35t       Served On - Qwest-Specific Field
SITEID                35f       Site ID - Qwest-Specific Field
SLRMK                 35e       Service Location Remarks - Qwest-Specific Field
SMC                   64        Spectrum Management Classes - Not currently used by Qwest
SNR                   49b       Selected Numbers Returned - Qwest-Specific Field
SN56FLAG              35m       Switched Net 56 Capability - Qwest-Specific Field
SSC                   98        Single Subscriber Carrier Indicator – Not currently used by Qwest
STATE                 31        State/Province
SUBDF                 32p       Sub Division From - Qwest-Specific Field
SUBDT                 32q       Sub Division To - Qwest-Specific Field
SUPPORTED             47d       Switch Support - Qwest-Specific Field
SVCCFG                61        Service Configuration - Not currently used by Qwest
SWIND                 35k       Switch Indicator
SWITCHNUM             47n       Number of Switches - Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently used by Qwest
SWTYP                 35j       Switch Type - Qwest-Specific Field
SWTYPE                47p       Switch Type - Qwest-Specific Field
SWTYPNUM              35i       Switch Type Number - Qwest-Specific Field
TC                    109       Taper Code - Not currently used by Qwest
TELNUMCKT             33c       Telephone Number Circuit - Qwest-Specific Field
TERMINAL ID           39k       Terminal ID - Qwest-Specific Field
TNADDRCKTIND          34d       TN, Address or Circuit Indicator - Qwest-Specific Field
TNCOUNT               49a       Telephone Number Count - Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently used by Qwest
TNRES                 43        Telephone Number Response
TNTYPE                40        Telephone Number Type
TOS                   9         Type of Service
TOTAL                 1d        Total Non-Premises/Premises Work Time - Qwest-Specific Field
TPRDI                 29a       Third Party, Resale or DSL - Qwest-Specific Field
TRMED                 89        Transmission Medium Type – Not currently used by Qwest
TTA                   35g       Traffic Terminating Area - Qwest-Specific Field
TYPE                  64a       Transport Protocol Type – Qwest-Specific Field
TXACT                 5         Transaction Activity
TXNUM                 2         Transaction Number
TXTYP                 4         Transaction Type
TYCA                  92        Type of Cable – Not currently used by Qwest
UNIT                  32o       Unit - Qwest-Specific Field
UNITNUM               32n       Number of Units - Qwest-Specific Field – Not currently used by Qwest
USOC                  34b       Universal Service Order Code - Qwest-Specific Field
USOCNUM               41b       Number of other USOCs - Qwest-Specific Field
WCCLLI                39g       Wire Center CLLI - Qwest-Specific Field
WCN                   110       Wire Center Name - Not currently used by Qwest
WLINUM                34l       Working Lines Left In - Qwest-Specific Field
WSOPI                 55        Working Service on Premises Indicator - Not currently used by Qwest
WTN                   54        Working Telephone Number
WTN – Informational   60b       Working Telephone Number - Qwest-Specific Field
Section
WTNQ                  39b       Working 10-digit Telephone Number Quantity - Qwest-Specific Field – Not
                                currently used by Qwest
WTNNUM                39c       Number of Working Telephone Numbers - Qwest-Specific Field
WTNSTAT               39f       WTN Status – Qwest-Specific Field
X75FLAG               35o       X75 Capability Identifier - Qwest-Specific Field
ZIP                   32        ZIP/Postal Code




                                              428

				
DOCUMENT INFO
Shared By:
Categories:
Tags:
Stats:
views:6
posted:7/14/2011
language:English
pages:428